Toshiba Rd Xs32Sb Owners Manual

2014-12-13

: Toshiba Toshiba-Rd-Xs32Sb-Owners-Manual-129046 toshiba-rd-xs32sb-owners-manual-129046 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 175 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Recording Playback Library Function setup Others

Introduction Editing

OPERATIONS

Read “INSTALLATION GUIDE” first.

TOSHIBA HDD/DVD VIDEO RECORDER

RD-XS32SB

Printed in China

Printed on 100% Recycled Paper

HDD/DVD VIDEO RECORDER

RD-XS32SB

DIGITAL VIDEO

P000403710

PM0016697010

OWNER’S MANUAL

Introduction

Table of contents

Introduction

Caution for safety................................................ 4

About this product .............................................. 5

Compatible discs ................................................ 6

Index to parts and controls .............................. 12

Front panel ........................................................... 12

Rear panel............................................................ 14

Remote control ..................................................... 16

Display ................................................................. 18

Before operating this recorder ........................ 20

Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU .. 23

Recording

Before recording ............................................... 26

Initializing a DVD-RAM/RW disc (Logical Format) ... 28

DVD-RAM physical format .................................... 29

Entering characters ............................................... 30

Recording a TV programme ............................. 32

Recording an external source.......................... 37

Programing a recording (REC MENU) ............. 40

VIDEO Plus+ Recording ................................... 46

Others................................................................. 48

Relay recording .................................................... 48

A-B recording ....................................................... 48

Reservation Disc (“Lock program record”) .............. 49

To delete recorded content .................................... 50

To protect recorded content ................................... 50

Technical information ............................................ 51

Playback

Information on playback ................................... 54

Playing recorded contents

(CONTENT MENU) ............................................. 55

Playing a DVD video disc ................................. 60

Locating a title using the top menu ........................ 61

Pausing a TV broadcast to resume later ......... 62

Playing a TV programme currently being

recorded ............................................................. 63

Playing at various speeds ................................ 64

Playing in fast reverse or fast forward .................... 64

Skipping to the next/previous chapter or track ........ 65

Playing in slow-motion .......................................... 65

Playing frame by frame ......................................... 66

Viewing still pictures

(Playing a disc that contains still pictures) .............. 66

Locating by entering the number .................... 67

Locating by entering the number of a desired

section ................................................................. 67

Locating a specific point by entering its elapsed time

(Time Search) ....................................................... 68

Watching a TV broadcast in the sub window

(P in P Playback) ............................................... 69

Selecting the camera angle .............................. 70

Selecting Subtitles ............................................ 71

Zooming a picture ............................................. 72

Selecting the sound .......................................... 73

Viewing JPEG files ............................................ 76

JPEG files compatibility......................................... 77

Playing MP3/WMA files ..................................... 78

Playable files ........................................................ 79

Checking the current status and settings ...... 80

Operational status and setting details .................... 80

Using the time bar................................................. 81

Functions in the Quick Menu ........................... 82

Editing

Before editing .................................................... 86

For better use the HDD of this recorder.................. 86

Editing on this recorder ......................................... 87

Creating chapters.............................................. 90

Playlist editing

(Collecting desired scenes) ............................. 95

Creating thumbnails

(Changing the picture on the

CONTENT MENU) ............................................ 100

Before dubbing................................................ 103

High speed Library dubbing

(Dubbing only a specified part) ..................... 106

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

Dubbing selected Items

(Dubbing specified parts together) ............... 108

Rate conversion dubbing

(Dubbing at a modified bit rate) ..................... 112

Line-U dubbing

(Recording pictures while viewing them) ..... 116

Deleting selected items

(Deleting multiple specified parts) ................ 118

Combine Original titles

(Combine two titles into one) ......................... 120

Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW ....... 122

DVD-Video finalizing process ........................ 132

DV recording

(Recording from a digital video camera) ...... 136

Library

Using Library data........................................... 140

Basic operation of the Library system .................. 140

Searching for a desired title ........................... 141

Changing the listing order ...................................... 141

Searching ........................................................... 141

Jumping ............................................................. 142

Viewing Library data ....................................... 143

Viewing title information ...................................... 143

Viewing disc information...................................... 143

Maintenance of Library data ................................ 144

Checking remaining space............................. 147

Viewing a number and space of a disc .................. 147

Viewing remaining space .................................... 147

Function Setup

Customizing the function settings ................ 150

DVD Player settings ............................................ 154

Picture/Audio settings ......................................... 157

Display settings .................................................. 159

Operational settings ............................................ 160

DVD recorder operation ...................................... 161

Management settings.......................................... 163

Setting of picture and sound quality for

recording ............................................................ 164

Others

Before calling service personnel ................... 166

Error codes on the display window ............... 169

Recording duration ......................................... 170

Language code list.......................................... 171

Specification .................................................... 172

Introduction

Caution for safety

Read “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS”,

“Precautions” and others of the “INSTALLATION GUIDE” first.

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

About this product

Introduction

Some differences

This DVD recorder is more similar to a computer than it

is to a standard DVD player. In addition to a

microprocessor, it contains a hard disc drive (an HDD),

an operating system, random access memory (RAM),

and a DVD-RAM/R/RW drive. The operating system

includes software stored on the HDD that is transferred

to the RAM when the machine is turned on and at other

times during operation. This transfer can take time.

Thus, when you turn on the DVD recorder, it may be a

minute or so before it is ready to use. Likewise, other

functions may not be performed as quickly as they would

on other AV equipment. In addition, because programs

stored on the DVD-RAM/R/RW drive cannot be accessed

as quickly as those stored on the HDD, accessing those

programs (or deleting a program from a DVD-RAM or

DVD-RW disc) may take more time. Please take these

factors into consideration as you use the DVD recorder.

About the hard disc drive (HDD)

Like any HDD, the HDD in the DVD recorder is a fragile

device that is susceptible to partial or complete failure if it

is jarred or as a result of use over time. It will not last

forever. Therefore, do not use the HDD for longer term

storage of programs you wish to retain. [If portions of the

HDD become damaged, programs recorded on those

portions may exhibit pixelization or block noise when

played back. Repeated playback of the program may

cause the problem to get worse and, eventually, the

program may become unplayable. Accordingly, if you

notice such noise in a program that you want to save,

you should transfer to a recordable DVD disc as soon as

possible.] Recordable DVD discs are also susceptible to

damage if not handled and stored carefully and some or

all of the programs on them may become unplayable.

You can reduce these risks by using high quality DVD

recordable discs and checking their playability from time

to time. If it becomes necessary to service your DVD

recorder, it may be necessary to delete some or all of the

programs on the HDD.

Playback Restrictions

This owner’s manual explains the basic instructions for

this recorder. Some DVD video discs are produced in a

manner that allows specific or limited operation during

playback. As such, the recorder may not respond to all

operating commands. This is not a defect in the

recorder. Please refer to the notes on compatible discs

later in this Introduction and to the discussion of DVD

playback and features later in this manual.

“” may appear on the TV screen during operation.

“” means that the operation is not permitted by the

recorder or the disc.

Recording Restrictions

Copy-protected contents of DVD-Video disc, VIDEO

CDs or audio CDs on the market cannot be copied on

this recorder.

Contents without copy protection should be copied or

edited only in accordance with applicable copyright

laws, which may restrict copying or editing. Contents

that permit single copying (copy once contents) can be

recorded onto DVD-RAM discs, with some dubbing and

editing restrictions. DVD-R/RW discs cannot record

these contents.

Compatiblity

In isolated cases, a disc bearing the DVD or CD logo

may not fully and properly play back all features. This

can be due, among other reasons, to problems and

errors that can occur during the creation or recording of

DVD and other software and the manufacture of

software discs (including blank discs). Moreover,

because of variations in the quality of discs, this

recorder may not be able to record on all discs that

bear a DVD-RAM, DVD-R or DVD-RW logo, but you

should not encounter difficulty if you use only high

quality recordable DVD discs.

Introduction

Compatible discs

When you want to play DVD or CD software or copy programmes from the HDD to a recordable DVD,

load an appropriate disc into the recorder. There are many types and formats of discs. Please use the

following information to select an appropriate disc.

Disc

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

DVD-RW

Mark Specification Remarks

•Single sided 4.7GB (12cm (4

in.))

•Double sided 9.4GB (12cm (4

in.))

•4.7GB For General Ver.2.0

(12cm (43/4 in.))

•Ver. 1.1 or later (12cm

(43/4 in.))

Read carefully the section “On DVD-RAM

discs” ( page 8).

Select a DVD-RAM disc that shows a

statement on its package such as “this disc

can be used with video recorders and drives

compatible with 4.7GB DVD-RAM discs” or

“this disc can copy images that permit single

copying.”

Read carefully the section “On DVD-R discs”

( page 9).

Depending on the disc status or the

recording equipment, playback of the disc

may not be possible on this recorder.

Read carefully the section “On DVD-RW

discs” ( page 9).

Depending on the disc status or the

recording equipment, playback of the disc

may not be possible on this recorder.

Notes

•Handle the disc according to the disc instruction manual.

•Depending on the data recording method or the disc status, playback or recording on this recorder may not be possible, even

if the disc is labeled as below. Toshiba cannot assure that all discs bearing the DVD or CD logos will operate as expected.

Please see the discussion of compatibility on page 5.

For recording / playback

Using different disc types for different purposes

DVD-RAM discs for your personal library

DVD-RAM discs comply with the global standard DVD-VR (Video Recording) format, and are optimized for recording of

TV programs. You can rewrite repeatedly without deterioration of an image quality, erase unnecessary parts, divide a

chapter, or specify playback area by frame. Its cartridge is suitable for a longer-term storage and family use, and its

large capacity of 9.4 GB allows more recording space.

DVD-R discs when creating your own original discs for distribution

DVD-R discs are designed to comply with the global standard DVD-Video format, and can be recorded only once.

DVD-R discs are convenient when you edit your original content (recorded personal events such as a wedding party)

with this recorder, transfer them to the recorder and make copies to send to your friends or relatives. The discs can be

played on other compatible DVD players. DVD-RW discs, which are rewriteable, can be used as well.

*DVD-R and DVD-RW may not be the best suited format for recording TV programs. Because of the way the discs

are formatted, it may not be possible to edit or divide the program as you may prefer, to record secondary languages,

or programs that are copy protected in a way that allows only one copy. (NOTE: “Copy once” protected programs

generally can be recorded to DVD-RAM discs.)

*This recorder records on a DVD-R/RW disc in DVD-Video format only. In DVD-VR format, recording is not possible.

* On DVD-R/RW discs, direct recording, copying or the method “Creating a DVD-Video” ( page 122) are available.

We cannot guarantee that DVD-RAM/R/RW discs recorded on this recorder will be playable on all DVD recorders/

players. Similarly, there is no guarantee that all DVD-RAM/R/RW discs recorded on other recorders will be playable on

this recorder.

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

•You cannot play discs other than those listed above.

•You cannot play non-standardized discs even if they may be labeled as above.

•You cannot play discs with specialized encoding (such as SACD discs) or the DVD audio portions of DVD Audio

discs.

•You cannot play SVCD discs.

•This recorder uses the PAL colour system for recording and playback. The NTSC colour system is used for playback

only, by selecting an appropriate setting. A disc may fail to play, if it has data in the PAL colour system and the NTSC

colour system. You cannot add the PAL colour system data to the disc with the data recorded in the NTSC colour

system even if they have region marks 2 or

ALL

•There may be some DVD discs designed for this market that cannot be played on this recorder. If you encounter

please contact TOSHIBA customer service.

•Toshiba cannot assure that all discs bearing the DVD or CD logos will operate as expected. Please see the

discussion of compatibility on page 5.

For playback only

DVD video

disc •12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.)

•Region number 2 or

ALL

The region number of this DVD recorder is 2.

If region numbers, corresponding to a

specific playable area, are printed on your

DVD video disc and you do not find 2 or

ALL

, or the disc is encoded to permit

playback only in regions other than Region 2,

disc playback will not be allowed by the

recorder.

Disc Mark Specification Remarks

CD-R

CD-RW

DVD-RW •12cm (43/4 in.)

•DVD-VR mode

VIDEO CD •12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.)

•Version 1.1 and 2.0

Audio CD

•12cm (43/4 in.)

•CD-DA (audio CD) format Depending on the disc status, playback may

not be possible.

•12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.)

It is not possible to play contents recorded

from programs which are not copy-free

Depending on the disc status, playback may

not be possible.

DIGITAL VIDEO

Introduction

On DVD-RAM discs

Use only DVD-RAM discs that comply with DVD-

RAM standard Version 2.0 or 2.1.

The recorder cannot record on a disc formatted in any

other standard. When using such a disc, initialize it by

using the disc-format function of this recorder.

The recorder may not record, dub, or edit some DVD-

RAM discs, because they are edited/recorded with

another manufacture’s equipment or PC, contain a

large number of titles, or have little remaining capacity.

Also, a DVD-RAM disc may not be edited or recorded

if its title contains still pictures.

DVD-RAM discs formatted in UDF2.0 on a PC are not

compatible with this recorder. Before using these

discs, initialize them on this recorder.

This recorder complies with current copyright

protection technology and can copy a disc only when

the disc permits copying once. When there is no

indication on the disc, copying will not be allowed.

Such an indication on a disc is required also for the

Library Management database.

DVD-RAM discs with cartridges are

recommended for recording.

Two types of DVD-RAM discs are

available: ones with cartridges and ones

without cartridges. You can use either of

them with this recorder, but the former

ones are recommended.

In order to record highly detailed data, make sure the

disc is clean. DVD-RAM discs with cartridges are

easier to handle in this regard.

Do not open the cartridge shutter. The disc may not

play, or may not be recorded or edited once it

becomes dirty.

There are two types of DVD-RAM cartridges;

removable (TYPE 2/4) and not removable (TYPE 1). It

is recommended you do not remove the disc even

when you can.

Refer to the instruction manual that comes with the

disc if it is absolutely necessary to remove the disc.

Some commercially available cartridge discs cannot

be recorded or edited once the inside discs are

removed.

To protect recorded contents

Slide the write-protect tab to

“PROTECT” with something small

enough. The disc can play, but

cannot be edited or erased. Refer

to the instructions that come with

the disc.

When using a disc without a

cartridge (commercially

available discs)

Discs without cartridges can easily

attract fingerprints and dust, which

is the reason they are not recommended. If you

cannot avoid using them, handle with proper care.

When you write in a title column on a disc, use a pen

with a soft tip. Do not use a pen with a hard tip, such

as a ballpoint pen.

Recommended discs

The following discs have been tested with this recorder:

9.4 GB double-sided cartridge: Panasonic LM-AD240U

4.7 GB single-sided cartridge: Panasonic LM-AB120U

The company does not hold any responsibility to compensate the contents which should have been recorded,

and any losses or damages (e.g. losses of business profit, or business intermission) that may arise from

malfunction of this recorder (not recording/editing as intended).

Problems arising in the following situations are included.

•When a DVD disc recorded on this recorder is used in a DVD recorder of another manufacturer, or used

(insertion, playback, recording or editing) in a personal computer DVD drive.

•When a DVD that has been used as above is used again in this recorder.

•When a DVD disc recorded in a DVD recorder of another manufacturer, or in a personal computer DVD drive

is used.

Some functions such as Library may not work with PC discs.

Compatible discs (Continued)

PROTECT

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

On DVD-R discs

Standards

DVD-R for General Ver.2.0 discs can be used for

recording and playback.

Discs compatible with 2X speed recording (labeled

Ver.2.1/2X etc.) and discs compatible with 4X speed

recording (labeled Ver.2.1/4X etc.) can also be used.

Select discs labeled “for video,” “for recording,” “120

min.” etc.

DVD-R for authoring Ver.1.1 cannot be used.

Recording conditions

Images for which copying is prohibited or restricted

(copy once or copy prohibited) cannot be recorded.

Even if the disc is labeled as CPRM compatible, this

recorder can only be used to record copy-free

material.

Recommended discs

Taiyo-Yuden 4X

Tested discs

Panasonic LM-RF120 (4.7GB/120 min.)

On DVD-RW discs

Standards

Discs labeled DVD-RW Ver.1.1 can be used.

Discs compatible with 2X speed recording (labeled

Ver.1.1/2X etc,) can also be used.

Select discs labeled “for video,” “for recording,” “120

min.” etc.

Recording conditions

Images for which copying is prohibited or restricted

(copy once or copy prohibited) cannot be recorded.

Even if the disc is labeled as CPRM compatible, this

recorder can only be used to record copy-free

material.

DVD-VR mode recording is not possible.

Recommended discs*

JVC 2X

Note

•There are limitations on times of repeat recording on the

same disc.

*Operation has been confirmed with recommended discs

and tested discs, but some other discs may not be

usable.

Marks on DVD video discs

The following are examples of marks and the meanings.

4:3

16:9 LB

16:9 PS

Mark Meanings

Number of audio streams

recorded in the disc.

(2 streams such as English and

Japanese in this example.)

Number of subtitle languages

recorded in the disc.

(2 subtitle languages are

recorded in this example.)

Number of camera angles

recorded in the disc.

(3 camera angles are recorded in

this example.)

Pictures are recorded in the

standard picture shape

(4:3 aspect ratio).

Pictures are recorded in the letter

box picture shape (4:3 aspect

ratio with horizontal black bars in

the top and bottom of pictures).

Pictures are recorded in the 16:9

wide picture shape.

TVs with 4:3 aspect ratio will

display them in the letter box

style.

Pictures are recorded in the 16:9

wide picture shape.

TVs with 4:3 aspect ratio will

display them in the pan scan style

(one or both sides of pictures

are cut).

Actual picture shape may vary

depending on the aspect ratio or

mode selection of the TV.

Introduction

Playback side

On handling discs

Do not touch the playback side of the disc.

Do not stick paper or tape to discs.

On cleaning discs

Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and

sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center

outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc clean.

If you cannot wipe off the dust with a soft cloth, wipe

the disc lightly with a slightly moistened soft cloth and

finish with a dry cloth.

Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner,

benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic

spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.

On storing discs

Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight

or near heat sources.

Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and

dust such as a bathroom or near a humidifier.

Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing

objects on discs outside of their case may cause

warping.

Compatible discs (Continued)

Structure of disc contents

Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and the

titles are subdivided into chapters.

VIDEO CDs/audio CDs are divided into tracks.

Title: Divided contents of a DVD video disc.

Roughly corresponds to a story title in short

stories.

Chapter: Divided contents of a title. This corresponds

to a chapter in a story.

Track: Divided contents of a VIDEO CD or an audio

CD.

Each title, chapter, or track is assigned a number, which

is called “title number”, “chapter number”, or “track

number” respectively.

Some discs may not have these numbers.

When you record on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, one

recording will always equal one title. You can divide a title

into several chapters by marking borders in it to facilitate

scene search.

DVD video disc

Title 1 Title 2

Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3Chapter 1

Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5

VIDEO CD / audio CD

Yes

Yes No

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

Discs and purposes

The table shows main functions which are available on this recorder per disc category.

This will help you choose discs.

Characteristics on this

recorder

For the first use

Recording a TV program

Erasing recorded contents

Recording additional content

on a recorded disc

Indexing recorded contents

Naming a title

Creating a thumbnail

Collecting favorite scenes

(Playlist Editing)

Making a new title from a Playlist

containing favorite scenes

(Copy within the same disc)

Playing contents recorded on

this recorder, on other devices

When a message appears and

the loaded disc cannot be

used:

DVD-RAM disc

Suitable for repeat use of the

disc, and data storage for

video library. Copy once

contents can be recorded

using a compatible disc.

No preparatory steps

required, however initializing

is recommended.

Yes

Contents can be played on

any devices compatible with

DVD-RAM discs. Follow the

instruction of the device to

play.

Initialize the disc.

If it is still unusable, try to

execute DVD-RAM physical

format.

DVD-RW disc

Suitable for saving data in

DVD-Video format to play on

compatible devices.

You can erase recorded

contents to use the disc

repeatedly.

Initialize the disc.

Yes

If the disc has been executed

DVD-Video finalizing

process, first cancel the

process then delete contents

Yes

If the disc has been executed

DVD-Video finalizing

process, first cancel the

process then delete contents

Yes

After you execute DVD-Video

finalizing process on a recorded

disc, you cannot name a title or

create a thumbnail.

Execute DVD-Video

finalizing process on this

recorder. This process

makes the disc playable on

other compatible devices.

(Some models excepted.)

Initialize the disc.

DVD-R disc

Suitable for saving data in

DVD-Video format to play on

compatible devices.

Once you execute DVD-

Video finalizing process on a

recorded disc so that it can

be played on other players,

you cannot make addition,

correction and deletion of

contents on the disc.

No preparatory steps

required.

Yes

Deleting contents cannot

restore the disc space.

After you execute DVD-

Video finalizing process on a

recorded disc, you cannot

delete contents of the disc.

Yes

After you execute DVD-

Video finalizing process on a

recorded disc, you cannot

add contents to the disc.

Yes

After you execute DVD-Video

finalizing process on a recorded

disc, you cannot name a title or

create a thumbnail.

Execute DVD-Video

finalizing process on this

recorder. This process

makes the disc playable on

other compatible devices.

(Some models excepted.)

–

Introduction

Index to Parts and Controls

See pages with arrows for details.

Front panel

1 ON/STANDBY button pages 20, 21

Turns the power on/restores the unit in the

standby mode.

2 Three mode button (HDD, TIMESLIP, DVD)

page 32, 55, 60, 62, 63

Selects recording/playback media.

3 INPUT SELECT button page 38

Pressing repeatedly selects between various input

sources.

4 CHANNEL buttons page 20, 33

Selects the channel.

(This is not avaialble to select satellite channels

regardless of the IR control cable connection and

the set top box setting.)

5 (OPEN/CLOSE) button page 20

Opens and closes the disc tray.

6 (PAUSE) button page 35, 60

Stops playback or recording momentarily.

7 (REC) button page 34

Starts recording.

* The above illustration displays the front panel with the cover open. See the following page on how to open or close the cover.

8 (STOP) button page 35, 60

Stops playback or recording.

9 PICTURE SEARCH ( ) button page 64

Scans the picture backwards.

10 PICTURE SEARCH ( ) button page 64

Scans the picture forward.

11 (PLAY) button page 60

Starts playback.

12 ON/STANDBY indicator page 20, 21

Displays the operational state of the recorder.

13 Remote sensor page 12 in “INSTALLATION

GUIDE”

14 DV IN connector page 136

Use this when recording from a digital video

camera.

15 INPUT jacks page 37

Use this when recording from other input source

such as a VTR or a camcorder.

Front panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 87 9

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

To open or close the cover on the front panel

Put your finger on the left edge of the cover and pull it

down to open.

Note

•Do not place a heavy object on the cover while it is

open. Doing so may damage the recorder.

Three mode indicator page 32, 55, 60, 62, 63

Indicates the selection by the three mode button.

17 Media indicator

Indicates the current media.

18 Operation Status Indicator (HDD)

Indicates the operation status of the HDD.

: Recording

: Playing

: Copying within the disc

19 HDD indicator

Illuminates in the HDD mode.

20 Operation Status Indicator (DVD)

Indicates the operation status of the DVD.

: Recording

: Playing

: Copying within the disc

21 Disc tray page 20

Place a disc to play or record.

22 Front panel display page 18

Index to Parts and Controls (Continued)

Introduction

Rear Panel

7 AV1(AUDIO/VIDEO)IN/OUT socket page 37

•Use this socket when connecting the TV that has

the terminal in this shape.

•Use this socket when connecting the video or

other equipment that has the terminal in this

shape.

8 CHANNEL CHANGE IR jack page 20 in

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”

Connect the supplied IR control cable to control

cable/satellite channels according to timer

programs.

9 DIGITAL BITSTREAM/PCM COAXIAL AUDIO

OUTPUT jack page 22, 23, 24 in

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”

Use this to connect the recorder to an audio

receiver equipped with a coaxial digital audio input

jack.

1 AC IN socket page 15 in “INSTALLATION

GUIDE”

Connects to the supplied power cord.

2 Ventilation fan

3 RF IN (FROM ANT.) input socket page 14 in

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”

Connects to an aerial or satellite signal.

4 RF OUT (TO TV) output socket page 14 in

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”

Connects the supplied coaxial cable to a TV.

5 VIDEO OUTPUT, AUDIO OUTPUT jacks

page 16 in “INSTALLATION GUIDE”

Outputs video and audio signals to a connected

TV or amplifier.

6 Component VIDEO OUTPUT jacks page 17

in “INSTALLATION GUIDE”

Outputs video signals to a connected TV or

monitor.

Connects to a TV or monitor equipped with

component video jacks.

1 4 652 3 7

1110

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

10 DIGITAL BITSTREAM/PCM OPTICAL AUDIO

OUTPUT jack page 22, 23, 24 in

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”

Use this to connect the recorder to an audio

receiver equipped with an optical digital audio

input jack.

When connecting the optical digital cable,

remove the cap and fit the connector into the jack

firmly. When not using the jack, keep the cap

inserted to protect it from dust intrusion.

11 AV2(SAT/DECODER)IN/OUT socket page

Use this socket when connecting the video or

other equipment that has the terminal in this

shape.

Index to Parts and Controls (Continued)

Introduction

Remote control

ENTER

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

EASY

NAVI

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR

CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

QUICK MENU

INSTANT SKIP

INSTANT REPLAY

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

SETUP ENTER

123

456

+10

789

DELETE

T.SEARCH

VIDEO Plus+

REC MODE

CLEAR

EXTEND

TV CODE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

23 46

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

*1MENU

Use this to display a menu screen that is recorded on

a DVD video disc.

Operate the menu screen as the same manner as

“Locating a title using the top menu ( page 61)”.

A menu screen is not recorded on some discs.

*2RETURN

Returns to the previous screen (the screen may be

specified depending on the disc).

Refer to the instructions of the disc.

OPEN/CLOSE button page 20, 21

MENU button*1

TOP MENU button page 61

ANGLE button page 70

SUBTITLE button page 71

HDD button page 32, 38, 55

TIMESLIP button page 62, 63

EASY NAVI button page 23

LIBRARY button page 140

REC MENU button page 40

SLOW button page 65

FRAME/ADJUST button page 40, 66

Direction buttons ( / / / ) page 55, 150

PAUSE buttton page 35, 56

REC button page 34

button page 55

DISPLAY button page 80

REMAIN button page 27

DIMMER button page 19

FL SELECT button page 19

Buttons for TV operation page 52 in

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”

SAT.CONT. button page 19, 32

SAT.MONI. button page 39

ON/STANDBY button page 20, 21

RETURN button*2

CHANNEL buttons page 20, 33

AUDIO button page 73

DVD button page 32, 38, 60

INSTANT SKIP button page 64

INSTANT REPLAY button page 64

CONTENT MENU button page 55, 95

EDIT MENU button page 108

SKIP button page 65

PICTURE SEARCH button page 55, 64

ENTER button page 55, 150

PLAY button page 60

QUICK MENU button page 24, 82

button page 150

STOP button page 35

TIME BAR button page 81

CHP DIVIDE button page 90

P in P button page 69

ZOOM button page 72

PROGRESSIVE buttton page 17 in

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”

INPUT SELECT button page 38

TV/DVR button page 35

VIDEO Plus+ button page 46

EXTEND button page 43, 45

Number buttons page 46, 67

SETUP button page 150

REC MODE button page 34

TV CODE button page 52 in

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”

T.SEARCH button page 67

CLEAR button page 67

DELETE button page 50

Index to Parts and Controls (Continued)

Introduction

Display

1 DUBBING indicator

Illuminates when copying.

2 PBC indicator

Illuminates when PBC function is “On” ( page

156) and a PBC-controllable VIDEO CD is loaded.

3 Angle icon page 70

Illuminates when playing a scene recorded with

multi angles.

4 Program recording indicator

Illuminates when the recorder holds a timer

program.

5 Bit rate indicator

Illuminates when displaying the bit rate selected

for recording, or when displaying the actual bit

rate.

6 REMAIN (Remaining space) indicator

Illuminates when an available recording time is

displayed.

7 VCD/CD indicator

VCD : Illuminates when a VIDEO CD is loaded.

CD : Illuminates when an audio CD is loaded.

8 Title indicator

Illuminates when a title number is displayed.

9 TRK (Track) indicator

Illuminates when a track number is displayed.

10 CHP (Chapter) indicator

Illuminates when a chapter number is displayed.

11 NICAM indicator

Illuminates when “NICAM” ( page 158) is set to

“On” and while receiving stereo stereo/Mode I, II/

mono programmes of NICAM broadcasts.

12 SAT indicator

See the next page.

13 PROGRESSIVE indicator

Illuminates when video signals are output in the

progressive format.

14 Picture quality mode indicator page 161

The current picture quality mode lights up.

The modes are: MN (Manual)/SP (Standard Play)/

LP (Long Play)/SP+LP+MN (Auto)

21 5 6 7 8 9

3 4

1712 13 14 16

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

Dimming the display

Pressing the DIMMER button on the remote control changes the brightness of the display (normal/dimmed/off).

Switching the display

Every time you press the FL SELECT button, the display changes between the channel, title number, and time.

The display may not change, depending on the disc or recording conditions.

15 Channel indicator

Displays the current channel or other numbers

such as a title number, track number, bit rate or

input selection.

16 Multi display

Displays the current time, elapsed time, remaining

time, starting time of programmed recording, chapter

number or message, etc.

17 Analog output level indicator

Displays the analog output level.

L+R: Stereo and bilingual (left (main) channel and

right (sub) channel)

L : Left (main) channel

R : Right (sub) channel

Off : Mono

Level indicator may not show exact sound level. It

only shows the average level.

SAT indicator and channel selection

While the SAT indicator illuminates, you can select

channels of a connected satellite receiver from the

recorder.

(It is necessary to finish the connection and the

settings ( page 20, 45, INSTALLATION GUIDE).)

Each time you press the SAT.CONT. button, the SAT

indicator turns on and off.

Is your recorder ready?

•Refer to the supplied “INSTALLATION GUIDE”

manual and finish the necessary preparations.

•Turn on the connected equipment such as a TV or

audio system and select the input from the recorder.

Turning the power on

(This owner’s manual instructions are based on

the assumption that all proper connections have

been completed and the TV is turned on.)

Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel of the

recorder or on the remote control.

When the power turns on, the ON/STANDBY indicator

changes from red (standby mode) to green (operation).

After a few seconds, a start-up screen appears.

The following icon appears at the top right corner of

the screen.

When this icon disappears, the recorder is ready to

operate. If the disc drive contains a disc, it takes a

little longer to start up.

Viewing TV channels through this recorder

After turning the power on, the recorder will output TV

channel signals to the connected TV (also in the stop

mode).

You can select a desired channel by pressing the

CHANNEL or the number buttons.

While the SAT indicator is on, channels of the

connected satellite receiver are selected. It is

necessary to finish the connection and the settings.

Refer to page 20, 45, INSTALLATION GUIDE.

Loading a disc

Check disc compatibility beforehand ( page 6, 7)

and use a proper playable disc.

Caution

•Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray. Neglecting this

may cause serious personal injury. Keep a close watch on

children.

•Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc.

1 Open the disc tray.

Press on the front panel or the OPEN/CLOSE

button on the remote control.

2 Insert a disc.

Disc without a cartridge

Insert with the playback side down.

There are two kinds of disc size. Place a disc to fit

the guide. If a disc is out of the guide, it may result

in damage to the disc or malfunction.

Place a disc in the

inside hollow.

Introduction

Before operating this recorder

ON/STANDBY button

CHANNEL buttons

ON/STANDBY button

ON/STANDBY indicator

OPEN/CLOSE button

button

e.g.

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

DVD-RAM disc with cartridge (TYPE1/TYPE2/TYPE4)

Single sided

Turn the printed side up, and insert the cartridge

into the tray frame following the direction of the

arrow on the cartridge.

Double sided

Turn the desired recording/playback side up, and

insert the cartridge into the tray frame following the

direction of the arrow on the cartridge.

3 Close the disc tray.

Press on the front panel or the OPEN/CLOSE

button on the remote control.

Notes

•Use the button on the front panel or the remote control to

open and close the disc tray. Do not push or hold the disc

tray while it is moving. Doing so may cause the recorder to

malfunction.

•Do not insert a disc which is unplayable, or any object

other than a playable disc.

•Do not apply downforce to the disc tray. Doing so may

cause the recorder to malfunction.

•If the disc tray stops while closing, the mechanical

protection system of this recorder will open it. Do not force

it to close. Doing so may cause malfunction.

•If the disc tray will not open, turn the recorder off, and

press the button on the front panel or the OPEN/

CLOSE button on the remote control. This may turn the

recorder on and open the disc tray. If it still won’t open,

contact your nearest TOSHIBA dealer.

Turning the power off

Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel of the

recorder or on the remote control.

The “Unloading” icon appears at the top right corner of

the screen, and the ON/STANDBY indicator turns red,

then the power turns off (Standby mode.)

Caution

•If the power fails or the power cord is disconnected from a

wall outlet while the recorder is in operation (ON/STANDBY

indicator lit in green), the HDD or a loaded disc may

become recording disabled. In such a case, executing an

initialization of the disc using the formatting function of the

recorder may refresh it. However, all contents stored on the

disc will be completely erased by this initialization process.

•This recorder may indicate alert messages with some

DVD-RAM discs right after insertion. If such a disc is used

for playback or recording on other equipment, all data in

the disc may be damaged and the disc will not be played.

By executing an initialization of the disc using the

formatting function of the recorder, the disc will become

operational.

•If the recorder freezes and does not respond at all, leave it

alone for about 15 minutes or longer. This may restore the

recorder. After the recorder has recovered, turn it off once

and turn it on again to use as usual. If the recorder is still

inoperable after more than 15 minutes have passed, press

and hold the ON/STANDBY button on the front panel or the

remote control for about 10 seconds or longer. The

recorder is forced to quit and the power turns off. Turn the

recorder on again and use it as usual. (This is an

emergency measure, which may cause losses and/or

damages of data. Avoid casual use of this measure. If you

try this while the recorder is working properly, especially

while the “Loading” or “Unloading” icon is flashing, it may

result in initializing of the HDD.) (This 15-minute measure

is available only when “Screen protector” is set to “On.”

( page 159))

Note

•If there are any performance malfunctions of the HDD or

the DVD-RAM drive, immediately discontinue use of this

recorder, and disconnect the power cord from a wall outlet,

then contact your dealer. Continuous use of the recorder in

such a condition will aggravate the condition and result in

increased cost and repair time.

Disc tray lock

You can lock the disc tray.

Press and hold on the front panel or PAUSE on

the remote control for longer than about 3

seconds.

To unlock, during stop press the button for longer than

about 3 seconds.

Note

•Turning the power off also unlocks the disc tray.

Introduction

Before operating this recorder (Continued)

Open

Start-up/Shutdown (closing) icons

These icons are displayed at the top right corner of the

screen when startup or finishing. While they are

flashing, the recorder is operating as follows:

Start-up, reading a disc, finishing the

recording

Unloading a disc, finishing the

operation

Opening a disc tray

Closing a disc tray

Status display

Each time you operate the recorder, the following

displays appear on the TV screen to indicate the

status of the recorder.

e.g.

Main on-screen displays

(Depending on the disc, some of these may not

appear.)

: Playback

: Pause

: Stop

: Fast-forward

: Fast-reverse

: Forward skip*

: Reverse skip*

: Forward slow-motion

: Reverse slow-motion

: Forward frame by frame playback

: Reverse frame by frame playback

: Recording

: Recording pause

: When title playback is completed

: Instant skip

: Instant replay

: Chapter division

: Forward skip by 1/20

: Reverse skip by 1/20

*Accompanied with the followings:

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Title number/title name and chapter number/

chapter name

DVD-VIDEO

Title number and chapter number

VCD

Track number

Notes

•To disable the status display, set “On screen display”

( page 159) to “Off.”

•You can add the current status of the settings to this

display. See page 80.

x1/2

Title

End

Chapter

Divide

x1/2

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU

The EASY NAVI button opens the “EASY NAVI Main Menu”, a main gate to the functions of this recorder.

From this menu, you can access the desired functions while viewing a current picture.

Additionally, the QUICK MENU button provides you a sub-menu of the current function.

EASY NAVI

Press EASY NAVI.

Sound is muted and the following GUI appears. (Actual displays vary depending on operational status.)

Introduction

Item selection

Press / / / to select an item, then press ENTER.

(Unavailable features are grayed out.)

Operating the finder (For the HDD, DVD-RAM discs, DVD-R/RW

discs recorded on this recorder and not finalized yet)

1) When the cursor is on the finder, press / .

You can view thumbnails of recorded contents.

• You can select the drive by pressing the HDD or DVD button.

2) When you find a desired content, press PLAY or ENTER.

The content is played.

•Pressing the ENTER button enlarges the finder’s playback picture to

the full of the screen.

•You can change playback speed. See page 64.

3) To stop, press STOP.

A current channel broadcast appears. (“TV:xxch” accompanies.)

•

Pressing the REC button starts recording. On recording, see page 25.

(Continued)

005 2004/04/03 19:00 Ch:2

TV:1ch

Original

(00:54:30)

00:10:15

HDD

Play Time

Time Slip

Timer Recording

Delete Title

Finalize (R/RW) Format (RAM/RW)

Edit Title Name Create Thumbnail

Setup

Dubbing

Play Contents

DV Recording

Main Menu

HDD

NAVI

EASY

Disc

Recorded title

last selected

Functions

Appears when the finder shows

the current broadcast.

Finder

Cursor

e.g.

ENTER

PLAY

STOP

EASY NAVI

HDD/DVD

/ / /

Item Function

136

100

106

150

132

page

Recorded contents are listed in a thumbnail view.

A list of timer programs appears.

The setting menu for recording contents from equipment

connected to the DV terminal appears.

You can delete the current content.

Operate according to the message.

You can access a menu to dub the current content.

An on-screen keyboard appears.

You can change the thumbnail picture.

You can execute the DVD-Video finalizing process on the

loaded disc.

You can format the loaded disc.

A setup menu appears.

Delete Title

Edit Title Name

Create Thumbnail

Finalize (R/RW)

Format (RAM/RW)

Setup

Dubbing

Timer Recording

Play Contents

DV Recording

Introduction

Quick Menu operation

To access various optional functions of this recorder,

open the Quick Menu. The Quick Menu displays a list

of selections relevant to your current mode.

Opening a Quick Menu

1) Press QUICK MENU.

The following menu (“Quick Menu”) appears.

(Actual selections vary depending on operational

status.)

2) Press / to select an item, then press

ENTER.

To exit the Quick Menu

Press QUICK MENU again.

Alternatively

Select “Exit” with / , then press ENTER.

Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU (continued)

To exit the EASY NAVI

Press EASY NAVI again.

Note

•For a disc other than the specified one, the finder cannot

be operated. To play the disc, exit the EASY NAVI then

press the PLAY button, or select the “Play Contents”

function.

•If a loaded disc contains NTSC signals, more functions will

be unavailable.

e.g.

Quick Menu

Title information

Restart title

Exit

Bit rate

Special playback mode

Recording

Recording variations for many types of programmes or

situations.

Before recording

Recording a TV programme

Recording an external source

Programing a recording (REC

MENU)

VIDEO Plus+ Recording

Others

Hint on reading this manual

The following icons show the playable discs for each

function described on this instruction manual.

: HDD

: DVD-RAM disc

: DVD-RW disc

: DVD-R disc

: DVD video disc

: VIDEO CD

: Audio CD

(For CD containing JPEG or MP3/WMA files,

see page 76, 78.)

Most instructions are based on remote control operation,

unless otherwise noted. You can use the buttons on the

remote control and those on the main unit as well when

they have the same function.

If copy protection signal is detected during

recording on this recorder, the recording

automatically pauses and a message appears. In

this case, the PAUSE button cannot release the

recording. (It is possible to end the recording by

pressing the STOP button.) If the copy protection

signal continues, the recording will terminate.

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

This recorder is equipped with a built-in HDD. Conventional video cassette recorders have required

tapes to record, while this recorder enables recording on the HDD whenever you want, without

selecting an available tape or confirming its recording time or tape remaining.

Further, the DVD-RAM drive on this recorder can record on a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc in the same way as

a tape. You can also copy contents recorded on the HDD to a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc to create your

own library.

Is your recorder ready?

Before recording a TV program on this recorder,

insure that channels you want to record are correctly

tuned in on this recorder.

If not tuned in, read the separate “INSTALLATION

GUIDE” volume again, and confirm all the necessary

connections and settings have been done.

Also, insure the clock is set precisely for program

recording. Set the clock using the “Initial settings”

menu ( page 30, INSTALLATION GUIDE).

Disc initializing

Whenever you use a new DVD-RAM/RW disc on this

recorder, be sure to initialize the disc. For DVD-RAM

disc, initialization is indispensable to the database

system of this recorder.

Normally, the HDD does not need to be formatted. If

the HDD does not work normally due to a problem,

format the HDD for possible recovery. Once you

format the HDD, all the recorded titles and Library

information are deleted. Before formatting, be sure to

write Library information to a DVD-RAM disc and

check any titles to be deleted.

DVD-RW discs can be emptied by initializing.

DVD-R discs can be used on this recorder without

initializing.

For details of initialization of DVD-RAM/RW discs, see

page 28.

If an initialized DVD-RAM disc is still unusable, it may

become usable by executing “DVD-RAM physical

format” in the “Management settings” menu.

For “DVD-RAM physical format”, see page 29.

Note on recording on a DVD-RAM disc

Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available

DVD-RAM disc to record on ( page 6, 8).

Some discs may need to be formatted for use on this

recorder. A message will appear asking you to execute

disc formatting. Follow the procedure displayed on-

screen to format the DVD-RAM disc compatible with

this recorder.

Some DVD-RAM discs formatted on a PC may not be

usable.

Note

•This recorder records on a DVD-RAM disc if it complies

with DVD-RAM standard Version 2.0 or 2.1. However, you

may not record on some DVD-RAM discs that have

complicated contents (often, to protect the recorded data).

When you select a DVD-RAM discs that has already been

recorded, check that the disc is suitable for recording or the

remaining time of the disc is displayed. It is recommended

to use a new DVD-RAM disc for an important recording.

Note on recording on a DVD-RW disc

Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available

DVD-RW disc to record on ( page 6, 9).

Some discs may need to be initialized for use on the

recorder. A message will appear asking you to execute

disc initializing. Follow the procedure displayed on-

screen for initialize the DVD-RW disc compatible with

this recorder.

Some DVD-RW discs initialized on a PC may not be

usable.

To play a DVD-RW disc recorded on this recorder on

other devices, finalize the DVD-RW disc on this

recorder. ( page 132)

The finalization disables the disc’s rewritability. To

rewrite a finalized DVD-RW disc, cancel the

finalization ( page 135).

•On DVD-RW discs recorded on other devices, you

cannot execute DVD-Video finalize process or

cancel the finalize process, or add recordings on

this recorder.

•You cannot rewrite or edit a DVD-RW disc if

recorded in DVD-VR mode.

•DVD-RW discs which are recorded on other

devices and not finalized yet, cannot be read on this

recorder. Do not rush to initialization. Check that the

contents can be erased or not.

Recording

Before recording

Please be sure to read this critical background information prior to making a recording.

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Note on recording on a DVD-R disc

Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available

DVD-R disc to record on ( page 6, 9).

To play a DVD-R disc recorded on this recorder on

other devices, finalize the DVD-R disc on this

recorder. ( page 132)

The finalization permanently disables the disc’s

writeability. (Cancelling the finalization is not possible.)

•DVD-Video finalize process cannot be cancelled if

once executed on a DVD-R disc.

•On DVD-R discs recorded on other devices, you

cannot execute DVD-Video finalize process or add

recordings on this recorder.

•DVD-R discs with the method of ”DVD-Video

Creation” have been alreadly executed the DVD-

Video finalize process. Therefore, they cannot be

added the contents.

If you want to record contents which will be copied

to a DVD-R/RW disc later on

See page 36.

To check space remaining on a disc

1) Press the REMAIN button.

The current capacity per disc is displayed at the

bottom of the screen. The current capacity of the

selected drive is displayed on the front panel display.

2) After checking the capacity, press the button

again to turn off the display.

Note

•You can also check the capacity of the disc by selecting

“Disc budget calculation” from the Quick Menu within the

REC MENU ( page 44).

When “HDD recording is not possible due to...”

appears

The HDD is full. To record new content, delete

unnecessary titles or transfer some content to a DVD-

RAM disc.

Notes

•The “Loading” icon appears in the top right of the screen after recording. This indicates that the unit is executing

the final recording process (writing managing information). Operations other than changing channels cannot be

done until this icon disappears. The time for executing this process differs depending on the recording time or

capacity of the disc.

•Note that all recording content may be deleted if the unit is disconnected from a wall outlet, or a power failure

occurs, during recording.

•If a power failure occurs within 5 minutes prior to the programmed recording start time, the programmed recording

may not be executed.

•A programmed recording may not be executed correctly if scheduled when Daylight-Saving time starts or ends.

Programmed recording and operational status

The recorder gives priority to programmed recordings

in every operating mode. Even if the recorder is

playing, recording or editing, or even in standby mode,

at a starting time of a programmed recording the

recorder will make itself ready or stop those

operations and start the recording.

However, “Creating a DVD-Video” ( page 122) and

“DVD-Video finalizing process” ( page 132)

operations may have priority over programmed

recordings.

When the programmed settings overlap

Before the first recording is completed, the second

programme is scheduled to begin recording. When

using a DVD-RAM disc, the recording of the previous

programme stops 15 seconds before the next

programme starts. (If you have been recording over 8

hours on the same drive, the current recording stops

approximately 2 minutes before the next programme

starts.)

When using a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc, the recording

of the previous programme stops about 2 minutes

before the next programme starts, to complete data

process. In this 2 minutes, you cannot operate the

loaded DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.

On a programmed recording across the change-

over of Daylight-saving time

•When the clock gains across Daylight-saving time

during a programmed recording, it means that the

recording completion time is consequently set one-

hour earlier. In this case, set the programmed

recording one-hour longer in advance. If not set

accordingly, the programmed recording stops one-

hour shorter.

•When the clock loses across Daylight-saving time

during a programmed recording, it means that the

recording completion time is consequently set one-

hour later. In this case, as the programmed

recording continues one-hour longer, delete

unnecessary chapters by chapter dividing after the

completion of recording.

How to initialize a disc

To initialize a DVD-RAM disc, load it in the recorder.

See page 20 for loading a disc.

1) During stop, press QUICK MENU.

The following menu appears. (The actual contents

depends on the operational status of the recorder.)

2) Press / to select “Disc management,” then

press ENTER.

A sub-menu appears on the right side.

3) Press / to select “DVD format,” then press

ENTER.

Numbering a disc

The recorder automatically numbers discs when

initializing. However, you can assign a desired number

(using 3 digits) and designate sides A and B on a double-

sided disc. (DVD-RW discs cannot be numbered.)

(1) Press the / buttons to select “Edit” of “Disc

Number” then press the ENTER button.

(2) Press the / buttons to select a digit.

(3) Press the / buttons to shift.

(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3).

(5) Press the ENTER button.

Naming a disc

You can name a disc.

(1) Press the / buttons to select “Edit” of “Disc

Name,” then press the ENTER button.

The character input window appears.

(2) Enter a disc name following the procedure of

“Entering characters” ( page 30).

(3) Press the button to eliminate the window.

Before recording (Continued)

Recording

Be sure to read this section prior to using a DVD-RAM/RW disc on this recorder for the first time.

For DVD-R, initializing is not necessary.

Initializing a DVD-RAM/RW disc (Logical Format)

A disc should be initialized in the following cases: (The

recorder may display a message to request you to do

so.)

e.g.

When you use a DVD-RAM/RW disc on this recorder

for the first time.

If data fragments produced by repeated recording or

erasing have accumulated.

If a disc error has occurred.

When you want to record on a DVD-RAM disc for PC.

( page 8)

Initializing formats a disc logically and insures that it will

perform to its full capability. However, this erases all data

on the disc, so make sure that it does not matter if data

on the disc is erased whenever you initialize a disc.

Quick Menu

Bit rate

Special playback mode

Disc management

DVD video compatibility

Aspect ratio(Video mode)

DVD-Video:CHP create

AV record quality

Exit

e.g.

Quick Menu

Bit rate

Special playback mode

Disc management

DVD video compatibility

Aspect ratio(Video mode)

DVD-Video:CHP create

AV record quality

Exit

Disc information

DVD format

e.g.

DVD format

0 0 1 –

Disc Number

Disc Name

Start Cancel

Edit

Format

e.g.

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

DVD-RAM physical format

Physical formatting is a simple execution for a disc which

cannot be used or read (or which is becoming hard to

read). It may refresh such a disc for recording and

playback. (There is no guarantee that all such discs will

be recovered.)

“DVD-RAM logical format” process only rewrites certain

data on file system and management information,

however, “DVD-RAM physical format” rewrites all data on

a disc, therefore it takes a much longer time to complete.

For a 4.7GB single sided DVD-RAM, about 70 minutes

will be necessary. While processing, all recorder

operations and functions including program recording will

not work until the process is finished. Also this process

erases all data stored on the DVD-RAM disc.

Notes

•The physical format process may fail if executed to a dirty

DVD-RAM disc. Also, the disc may be difficult to record,

even if it finished. Before executing DVD-RAM physical

format process, be sure to confirm the disc is not dirty.

Clean it if necessary. If the disc has scratches or dust

beyond cleaner’s efficacy, do not execute DVD-RAM

physical format process on the disc.

•The following DVD-RAM discs require physical formatting:

–A disc which is not formatted correctly.

–The disc which has errors during writing because of dirt

on the disc, and cannot be further recorded, or cannot

initialize normally.

•You need to start physical formatting from the first step

again when you use a failed disc.

•Physical formatting does not work if the disc contains a lot

of voids beyond the limitation of this recorder.

•If an error occurs in physical formatting, “ERR-01” appears

in the front panel display. To turn off the message, press

the DISPLAY button on the remote control.

4) Press / to select “Start,” then press ENTER.

5) Press / to select “Start,” then press ENTER.

Initialization starts.

When initialization is completed, the setup window

disappears.

1) During stop, press SETUP.

2) Press / to select “Management settings”

then press ENTER.

3) Press / to select “DVD-RAM physical

format,” then press ENTER.

4) Press / to select “Yes,” then press ENTER

to execute.

To cancel, select “No”, then press the ENTER

button.

5) Read the message, and press / to select

“Yes” or “No”, then press ENTER.

Yes

Warning: It will take approximately

70 minutes to format a 4.7GB DVD

and all data will be erased. Confirm

hat timer programing is not

scheduled.

Proceed?

Format

DV D format

Start

Entire disc contents excluding

library data will be erased

if disc is formatted. Proceed?

Cancel

e.g.

DV D format

Format

DVD

Formatting

e.g.

SETUP

e.g.

HDD auto stop

All HDD titles delete

Eco. mode Off

Off

Management settings

DVD-RAM physical format

Software version

DVD drive software

HDD format

Genre setting

Before recording (Continued)

Recording

Entering characters

Operation guidance of the remote control

To enter the character, normally use the direction

/ / / buttons on the remote. About the other

buttons to be used are shown on the operation guide.

: Shifts a cursor.

: Enters the number.

: Erases one character immediately to the left

side of the cursor.

: Erases all the characters on the input column.

: Caps Lock

: Saves the changes on the input column and

returns to the previous screen.

: Cancels the changes on the input column and

returns to the previous screen.

: Enters a space.

: Enters a symbol.

Switching a language

Before entering a character, move a cursor to the

language selection area by pressing the / buttons.

Then press the / buttons to select a language,

then press the ENTER button.

Title information

CONTENT

003

Chapter

English

Spanish

French

German

Italian

etc...

Input

12 3

456

789

Select

ReturnSave

Caps Lock

Space

All ClearBkSp

Direct(0-9)

Cursor

CLEAR

CLEARDELETE

DELETE

12345678 0-

;

’9

qwe r t yu i p [ ]o

asdfghjk :

BkSp

zxcvbnm, /

Delete

Space Space Space

Clear All

Estimated limit of

Characters displayable

on the CONTENT

MENU.

Estimated end of the

first line on the

CONTENT MENU.

The character being

selected appears.

Operation guide

e.g.

Cursor

An entered character

will appear here.

Language

12 3

456

789

CLEAR

DELETE

;

/,.

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Entering characters

The cursor may be followed by unwanted characters.

You can erase them if necessary by either of the

following measures:

Erasing characters

•Erasing all the characters on the writing board

Select “Clear All” by pressing the / / / buttons,

then press the ENTER button.

Alternatively, open the lid of the remote control and

press the CLEAR button.

•Erasing one character before the cursor

Select “BkSp” by pressing the / / / buttons,

then press the ENTER button.

Alternatively, open the lid of the remote control and

press the DELETE button.

(1) Press the button to select an input mode.

(2) Press the / / / buttons to select a character,

then press the ENTER button.

The selected character is input on the cursor.

(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) to enter characters.

(4) When finished, press to save the characters.

The characters you entered appears.

Notes

•You can enter up to 64 characters.

•When unnecessary information appears, or when you want

to alter the input character, press the CLEAR button to

erase all, or press the DELETE button to erase an

unnecessary character.

Recording a TV programme

To record a TV programme currently being broadcast, follow the procedures of this chapter.

Recording

1Press HDD or DVD to select a media to record

on.

HDD : To record on the HDD.

DVD : To record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc.

2Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select a

recording source.

Each time you press the button, the indicator alternates.

Ch: To record a TV programme with recorder

tuner.

L: To record a source connected to the INPUT

jacks on the front panel ( page 37).

AV1: To record a source connected to the AV1

socket on the rear panel ( page 37).

AV2: To record a source connected to the AV2

socket on the rear panel ( page 37).

L-U: To record pictures currently played ( page

116).

To record a satellite programme, press the SAT.CONT.

button to turn on the SAT indicator. The input you have

set ( page 45, INSTALLATION GUIDE) is selected.

For details, see page 19.

Preparation

•When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder.

- Load a disc which has sufficient space available to record the programme.

- Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected.

•If you record on a DVD-R or a DVD-RW disc, set “DVD compatible mode” ( page 162) to “On (Mode I)” or “On

(Mode II)”. In DVD-R/RW recording, “Off” setting is regarded as “On (Mode I)”.

•If you record on a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc, set “Aspect ratio(video mode)” ( page 162) according to recording

sources.

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

INPUT SELECT

DVD

HDD

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

SAT.CONT.

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

3Press the number buttons to select a channel

to record.

The CHANNEL buttons ( /) are also available.

•While the SAT indicator is on, channels of the

connected satellite receiver are selected.

4Press QUICK MENU to display the Quick

Menu. (If you want to use the default setting for “AV record

quality,” skip to step 8.)

5Press / to select “AV record quality,” then

press ENTER.

6Press / to select a media to be recorded,

then press ADJUST to select the setting

number.

See page 41 for details on “Mode”, “Rate” and

“Audio quality”.(Continued)

123

456

789

QUICK MENU

ENTER

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

SETUP ENTER

T.SEARCH

CLEAR

312

VIDEO Plus+

REC MODE

EXTEND

TV CODE

456

DELETE

+10

789

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

REC

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

Open the lid.

SETUP

e.g.

HDD DVD

Custom setting

Setting

Total recording time: 71min.

(with 4.7 GB unused)

Manual

6.6

Mode

Rate

Audio quality

Manual1

Setting 1 – – –

L-PCM

D/M1

Manual

6.6

4.6

2.2

6.0

3.2

4.6

D/M1

L-PCM

D/M1

D/M2

D/M1

AV record quality

7Press ENTER.

The menu disappears.

8Press REC.

Recording starts.

Recording a TV programme (Continued)

Recording

Selecting the recording mode

Before recording, you can select the setting of picture and sound quality. During stop mode, press the REC MODE

button. By pressing the button repeatedly, you can select one from 5 settings of “AV record quality” appearing in

the front panel display.

Notes

•During recording, you cannot change the recording parameters, such as modes, channels, etc.

•The number of titles cannot exceed 99 for a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc or 396 for the HDD.

•One continuous recording cannot exceed in any case 8 hours. Recording automatically stops at 8 hours.

•During normal recording, you can set the programmed recording using the REC MENU.

•You cannot start recording immediately before a programmed recording starts.

•For recorded sound, see page 74.

•During monaural sound recording, the same sound is recorded on both the left and right channels.

•When “Audio” is set to “L-PCM”, multi-channel sound is recorded as stereo sound. When playing this recorded sound, you

will hear NICAM Mode I and NICAM Mode II sounds simultaneously. Press the AUDIO button to select a desired sound.

•

When “DVD compatible mode” is set to “On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode II)”, the unit records the same sounds on both the left

and right channels when receiving monaural sound. When receiving the NICAM Mode I/Mode II sound, the selected sound,

Mode I or Mode II, is recorded on both the left and right channels

•Depending on the disc condition, pressing the REC button may take a longer time to start recording.

•

When a starting time of a programmed recording comes, a recording in execution is stopped and the programmed recording

starts. If you do not want to stop the recording, cancel the timer program before it starts

•Even if you set “Aspect ratio(video mode)” ( page 162) to “16:9”, images are recorded in 4:3 aspect ratio when using a

DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with “Rate” set to “1.4” (Mbps).

•Be careful of a programmed recording across the change-over of Daylight-saving time ( page 27).

REC

ENTER

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

QUICK MENU

ENTER

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

To stop recording

Press STOP.

To pause recording (to omit an unnecessary

portion)

During recording, press PAUSE.

To resume recording, press it again.

Note

•Pausing recording automatically creates a new chapter

division at that point.

To change a TV channel to be recorded

1) During recording, press PAUSE.

Recording pauses.

2) Press CHANNEL to change the channel.

3) Press PAUSE to resume recording.

To view a TV programme while recording

another

1) Start recording on this recorder.

2) Press the TV/DVR button.

3) Using the channel selector of the TV, select a

desired channel on the TV.

If you press the TV/DVR button again, you will

go back to the display that you are recording.

2:13

End time

e.g.

To record and play at the same time

To start recording while playing a disc

Stop playback, then select the other disc by

pressing the HDD or DVD button, and start

recording on that disc.

To play a disc while recording on another disc

Select the disc that is not being recorded by

pressing the HDD or DVD button, and start

playback on the disc.

Note

•During a dubbing job, the unoccupied drive is available for

recording or playback, however, cannot perform a function

which records and plays simultaneously.

To set an end time of a recording which is in

progress

1) During recording, press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

2) Press / to select “End time” then press

ENTER .

The display changes as follows:

3) Press / to select an item then press

ADJUST to change the value.

4) Press ENTER.

Notes

•By setting an end time, it is memorized as a programmed

one, and the indicator in the front panel display

illuminates to indicate that the recorder holds a timer

program of recording.

•The programmed end time must be set for 5 minutes later

than the current time.

Recording a TV programme (Continued)

Recording

To play a recorded title while recording another

on the same disc (Recorded Title Play)

HDD

DVD-RAM

During recording, you can play a title recorded on the

same disc.

1) While recording, press CONTENT MENU.

2) Press / / / to select a desired title, then

press the ENTER.

Playback of the selected title starts.

Pressing the STOP button stops playback, and the

content currently recorded returns. If you press the

PLAY button, playback resumes from the location

you last stopped.

Notes

•The playback picture may appear after a delay of several

seconds.

•While you are using this function, the following operations/

functions are not available.

- Programmed playback (repeat playback, intro scan etc.)

- Editing (Playlist programming, dubbing, title/chapter

naming, title thumbnail setting, etc.)

•This function is not available at a 10 minutes overlapped

portion of the relay recording or A-B recording ( page

48).

•Depending on the data condition, playback may pause.

•During a dubbing job, this function is not available.

When recording contents which will be copied

to a DVD-RW/R disc later on

Before recording, set “DVD compatible mode” (

page 162) to “On”.

Each timer program must to be set its “DVD

compatible mode” from the Quick Menu.

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording

Recording an external source

You can record programmes from connected equipment on the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc.

Connect according to A or B.

A: Using the AV socket on the rear of the recorder

B: Using the input jacks on the front of the recorder

•To record a clearer picture, use the

S video jack.

The S-VIDEO jack has priority over

the VIDEO (yellow) jack.

To video

output jack To audio

output jacks

Audio cable

Video cable

Rear of the

recorder

AV1(AUDIO/VIDEO)IN/OUT (AV1)

INPUT (Line)

Yellow White Red

To AV socket

For recording from a digital

video camera recorder, etc.

connected to the DV input

terminal on the front panel, see

page 136, “DV recording.”

AV2(SAT/DECODER)IN/OUT (AV2)

External equipment

Preparation

•When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder.

–Load a disc which has sufficient remaining space to record the programme.

–Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected.

Notes

•Even if a source of high quality sound track such as DVD audio is recorded with this recorder, the sound quality becomes

regular audio CD’s one. Refer to the instructions of the connected equipment.

•When you record an external source onto a DVD-R/RW disc or a contents which will be copied to a DVD/R/RW disc later on,

set the connected equipment to output sound you want to record (if selectable such as multiplex broadcasting), as the

recorder records sounds of external source in the stereo type onto a DVD-R/RW disc, neglecting the setting of “DVD

compatible mode” ( page 162).

• DVD-R/RW discs cannot record contents with copy restriction signal embedded (copy-protected or copy once contents),

DVD-RAM discs can record copy once contents.

•Some satellite programmes via a connected tuner may contain both 4:3 pictures and 16:9 pictures. DVD-R/RW discs cannot

record such contents, under restriction of DVD-Video standard. To record them, use the HDD or DVD-RAM discs.

(Continued)

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

1Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly so that “L,”

“AV1” or “AV2” appears on the front panel

display, corresponding to the input in which

the device is connected.

Each time you press the button, the indicator changes.

L: To record pictures from equipment connected to

the INPUT jacks on the front panel.

AV1: To record pictures from equipment connected to

the AV1 socket on the rear panel.

AV2: To record pictures from equipment connected to

the AV2 socket on the rear panel.

L-U: To record pictures currently played ( page 116).

To record a satellite programme, press the SAT.CONT.

button to turn on the SAT indicator. The input you have

set ( page 45, INSTALLATION GUIDE) is selected.

For details, see page 19.

2Press HDD or DVD to select a recording

media.

HDD : To record on the HDD.

DVD : To record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc.

3Start playback of the source content on the

connected equipment.

4Press REC of this recorder to start recording.

5When recording is completed, press STOP.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

SAT.CONT.

Recording

Recording an external source (Continued)

INPUT SELECT

DVD

HDD

REC

STOP

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Notes on recording from a connected VCR or camcorder

Check the condition of the source equipment before playing.

Set the equipment in good condition, e.g. clean the head or adjust the tracking, etc. to obtain optimum playback.

Bad condition may produce noises in playback. These noises may be detected as copy protection signals,

resulting in stop of recording on this recorder.

Play a source in an usual mode. Avoid using any correcting or enhancing features, as they may add signals

which can be detected as copy protection signals.

Source quality or tape condition beyond adjustments on the source equipment may stop a recording on this

recorder.

Do not operate the source equipment during recording on this recorder.

Operations such as pausing, resuming, fast-forwarding (CUE) and fast-reversing (REVIEW), etc. may produce

noises, which may be detected as copy protection signals. Therefore, first start playback on the source

equipment to confirm that the desired source can be played properly, and then start recording on this recorder.

Do not operate the source equipment during recording. After completing the desired scene, stop the recording on

the recorder, and then stop the playback on the source equipment. Delete unnecessary scenes using editing

functions ( page 118). If you want to operate the source equipment during recording, pause or stop the

recording. After operating the source equipment, resume the recording as above.

When recording from a camcorder

Follow the above notes. Be sure to power the camcorder by its AC adapter, not batteries. If batteries are used,

the recording may be finished on the way.

Satellite monitor function

•To view a satellite programme while recording a TV programme

1) Start recording on this recorder.

2) Press the SAT.MONI. button.

3) Select a desired satellite channel.

•To view a satellite programme while the recorder is in the playback or stop mode

1) Press the SAT.MONI. button.

2) Select a desired satellite channel.

Notes

•Pressing the SAT.MONI. button again ends the satellite monitor function.

•While the satellite monitor function is working, “SATMON” is displayed on the front panel display.

Recording

Programing a recording (REC MENU)

Use the REC MENU to program a recording. It will take less time to prepare, as it provides all necessary

information for recording, including estimated disc space remaining.

For more information, see “Before recording” ( page 26).

Be careful when you program a recording across the change-over of Daylight-saving time ( page 27).

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

1During stop, press REC MENU.

The “REC MENU Timer Programing” appears.

2Press ENTER.

“CH” is ready for setting.

3Select an item by pressing / , then press

ADJUST ( /) to set the item.

•Refer to the setting items on the next page.

•You can also set the item by pressing the / buttons.

•“CH” can be input by the number buttons.

To select channels of the connected satellite receiver, first press

the SAT.CONT. button so that “S” appears in “CH”, then select

the channels (1-999). The number buttons are also available.

Be sure to keep the satellite receiver powered on.

4When complete, press ENTER.

To programme another recording, press the button to

move to the next line, then repeat steps 2 to 4.

5Press REC MENU to exit.

Your programme is entered.

•If you want to turn off the power, press the power

button.

REC MENU

ENTER

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

SETUP ENTER

T.SEARCH

CLEAR

312

REC MODE

EXTEND

TV CODE

456

DELETE

789

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

REC

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

VIDEO Plus+

Open the lid.

CLEAR

REC

Timer Programing

1/ 1

19:00

4/3 (Sa)

Audio

RateMode

Media

EndStart Disc

4.6

D/M1

HDD

CH Date

Exec

--- --: :--

------- -- --

e.g.

REC

Timer Programing

1/ 1

4.6

D/M1

HDD

CH Date

Exec

2----

------- -- --

Audio

RateMode

Media

EndStart Disc

19:00

4/3 (Sa)

e.g.

REC

Timer Programing

1/ 1

4.6

D/M1

DVD

CH Date

Exec

4/10 (Sa)

19:00

4/3 (Sa)

Audio

RateMode

Media

EndStart Disc

e.g.

ENTER

REC MENU

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

A timer program with this mark will be executed, To disengage, remove

this indicator.

Select a channel you want to record.

(While “L”, “AV1” or “AV2” is selected, the number buttons are not

available to select channels.)

Select a date of a TV programme you want to record.

Enter a starting time of recording. (An initial setting is 10 minutes later.)

You can also use the number buttons under the lid.

Enter an end time. (Set the timer to begin recording no sooner than 2

minutes past the current time. Recording must not exceed 8 hours.)

You can also use the number buttons under the lid.

When you record on a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc.

When you record on the HDD.

When you use A – B (double-side) recording ( page 48). “Mode” is

automatically set to “Auto”.

Standard setting of recording time and picture quality. (Not applicable

when “L-PCM” is selected.)

For longer recording, but inferior to “SP” in picture quality. (Not

applicable when “L-PCM” is selected.)

Customized setting of rate (bit rate).

To set a rate automatically according to the remaining volume of the

disc. (If the disc does not have room for the TV programme, the

programme cannot be recorded to the end.)

When you select an HDD, the recorder records for a length of time

corresponding to that of a blank DVD-RAM disc (4.7GB). Not

applicable to a recording for 2.5 hours or longer.

Not applicable when “SP”, “LP” or “Auto” is selected. You can set a

rate at intervals of 0.2Mbps from 2.0 to 9.2. (The upper limit of the

value depends on the “Audio” setting.)

Standard setting.

Superior to D/M1.Recommended for recording music programmes.

Uncompressed original digital audio. Equal quality to audio CD, but

recordable time will be shorter.

A programmed recording onto a Reservation Disc is marked with an

icon.

Exec

Date

Start*

End*

Media

Mode

Rate

Audio

Disc

√

1-99, L, AV1, AV2

Specified date (from today to 2

month later)

Every Sunday to Saturday, Monday

to Thursday, Monday to Friday,

Monday to Saturday, everyday.

0:00 - 23:59

DVD

HDD

A–B

MN(Manual)

Auto

1.4, 2.0-9.2

D /M1**

D /M2**

L-PCM

Notes

•See page 51, 161 for details on “Mode”, “Rate”, and “Audio”.

•If you record with setting the bit rate to about 4.0 Mbps or below, the recorded pictures may not be played properly if change

the playback speed. There will be noise, and the picture quality is lower than other rate settings.

Suggestions for the picture quality setting

•For normal recording or when you cannot decide which mode to choose.

Select “SP”.

•When you need a longer recording time and video quality is not important

Select “LP”. Inferior to “SP” in picture quality, but it can record longer.

•To record a high picture quality

Select “MN (Manual)” to set a desired bit rate. The higher the bit rate, better the picture quality is, but shorter the

recording length becomes. We recommend that you set about 6.0 Mbps to 6.8 Mbps.

•To fill the disc

Select “Auto”. A bit rate is calculated automatically according to the remaining volume of the disc. Some contents may not be

recorded on the disc even if you select this function. This is not the function to make full use of the remaining space capacity.

Setting items

*“Start” and “End” accept time up to 30:59 if you use the number buttons. When you enter a time over 24:00 and press the

ENTER button, “Date” will gain one day, and the time will be corrected to 0:00-6:59.

** The digital recording technology for consumer products of Dolby Laboratories is used for D/M1 and D/M2. Dolby

Digital 192 kbps is set for D/M1 and Dolby Digital 384 kbps for D/M2.

(Continued)

Programming a recording (REC MENU) (Continued)

Recording

Notes

•The disc tray does not close automatically, even when the recording start time arrives. Set the recorder loaded an available

DVD-RAM/R/RW disc beforehand.

•It is not possible to record the same contents onto both the HDD and a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc simultaneously.

•When there is little time before a programmed recording starts, you may not be able to start another recording.

•Playback of the DVD drive pauses when a programmed recording onto the HDD starts.

•Confirm the “DVD compatible mode” ( page 162) setting. “Main” or “SAP” records main sound or sub-sound of multiplex

broadcasts respectively, and does not record the other. Therefore, select “Main” or “SAP” only when you record onto a DVD-

R/RW disc.

•When recording onto a DVD-R/RW disc, set “DVD compatible mode” ( page 162) to the desired recording sound for each

timer program.

Setting the details for every timer program

You can specify detail items for each of your timer

programme.

1) Press QUICK MENU at step 3 on page 40.

The Quick Menu is displayed.

2) Press / to select an item and press ENTER.

AV record quality

Select an item from registered selections (1-5) for

the picture and audio quality.

Edit title name

Enter a name for the timer program.

Use the input screen to enter a name ( page

30).

PDC on

Perform the programme PDC recording.

PDC (Programme Delivery Control System)

Programme PDC is a system of telling the recorder

when a programme actually starts. Typically, when

you want to record a programme you will tell the

recorder to start recording, probably, five minutes

before the advertized starting time of the

programme and to finish ten minutes or so after the

programme is due to finish. So even if the

programme starts early or finishes late you will

normally still get to see what you wanted to record.

However when live programmes over-run or the

day’s television schedule is changed from that

advertized, you may miss the desired programme

REC

Timer Programing

1/ 1

CH Date

Exec

19:00

4/3 (Sa)

Audio

RateMode

Media

EndStart Disc

4.6

D/M1

DVD

4/10 (Sa)

e.g.

DVD-R Broadcast Record

AV Record Quality

Genre setting

Quick Menu

AV record quality

Edit title name

DVD compatible mode

PDC on

Chap. mute

Exit

High rate save

Aspect ratio(Video mode)

which may have been delayed or even cancelled

and the recorder will record the programme even if

it is two or more hours late. With PDC, you enter the

exact start time and the recorder will wait until the

signal is sent to confirm the programme is starting

and the recorder will record the programme even if

it is two or more hours late.

PDC off

Perform the normal programmed recording.

DVD compatible mode

When recording onto a DVD-R/RW disc or

recording a content which will be copied to a

DVD-R/RW, make this selection ( page 162) for

each timer program.

“Off” setting is neglected and regarded as “Main” in

DVD-R/RW recording.

Aspect ratio(Video mode)

Select the aspect ratio when recording onto a

DVD-R/RW disc. ( page 162)

High rate save

Use this feature when you want to save space while

using the best picture quality rate for recording. This

will use 9.2 Mbps for recording and reduce the rate

temporarily for the portion where the high rate is not

required where picture is fairly constant.

Off : This feature is disabled and the normal

recording is performed.

On : This feature is enabled.

Notes

•When the audio quality is set to “L-PCM”, the picture

quality is set to “Manual 8.0 Mbps”. When the audio

quality is set to any other selection, the picture

quality is set to “Manual 9.2 Mbps”.

•While this is set to “On,” you cannot change the mode

or rate.

•The space used may not change, depending on the

picture contents.

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Shifting a time period of a recording (Time

Shift)

If a prior TV programme extends beyond its scheduled

time and into one that you programmed, you can shift

the programmed start and end time of the recording.

1) Press REC MENU.

The REC MENU appears.

2) Press / to select a timer program you want

to shift the time period.

3) Open the lid of the remote control and press

EXTEND.

“Start time” and “End time” are ready to be input.

4) Press EXTEND repeatedly.

Each time you press the button, “Start time” and

“End time” is shifted in 10 minutes intervals to, up

to 60 minutes later.

5) Press ENTER.

6) Press REC MENU to exit.

Note

•After you shifted the time of a timer program which will be

repeated daily or weekly, you should restore the original

start/stop time for future recordings.

Adding a timer program

1) Press REC MENU.

The REC MENU appears.

2) Press to select a blank line, then press

ENTER.

3) Press / to select the item, then press

ADJUST to set the item.

4) When complete, press ENTER.

5) Press REC MENU to exit.

Note

•While the recorder is preparing for or executing a

programmed recording, you cannot add a timer program

which will start within 5 minutes and 15 seconds from the

current time.

Deleting a timer program

1) Press REC MENU.

The REC MENU appears.

2) Press / to select a timer program you want

to delete.

3) Press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

4) Press / to select “Program cancel”, then

press ENTER.

Check the message, then delete the entry.

5) Press REC MENU to exit.

Note

•You cannot delete a timer program while another is

executed.

Chap. mute

This feature automatically creates divisions for

chapters when no audio (no audible sound) portion

is found.

For example, when you have recorded a

programme of music clips, you can use this feature

to jump to the beginning of a clip during playback. It

does not create completely independent chapters

or automatically divide into chapters when no audio

portion is found.

Off : This feature is disabled.

On : Division for chapters when no audio portion is

found.

Notes

•Divisions for chapters may not be created,

depending on the contents of the programme or the

condition of no audio portion, or it may be created at

different positions. A division for a chapter may be

created within a music clip.

•Depending on the specification made for the

recording sound level, a division for a chapter may

not be created or it may be created at different

positions.

•Setting “On” may create many chapters, and their

number may reach the maximum allowed. At that

point, no more chapters can be created. In this case,

decrease the chapters, for example by combining

chapters ( page 94).

•This feature is not available on DVD-R/RW discs. To

create chapters automatically during recording on

DVD-R/RW discs, set “DVD-Video:CHP create.” (

page 162).

Genre setting

You can set a genre before setting programmed

recording.

To see the registered list, refer to Genre setting

( page 163).

Set the genre according to recording contents.

The selection you have made for the timer program

is shown at the bottom of the display.

13:00 13:54

13:20

20 minutes

extend

Time Shift

14:14

REC

Disc budget calculation

6.6

D/M2

HDD

4/10 (Sa)

::–

–

11 50

6.6

D/M2

DVD

4/13 (Tu)

10 00

2.2

D/M1

HDD

4/16 (Fr)

4.6

D/M2

DVD

4/16 (Fr)

Result

Date

DVDHDD

Elapsed AvailableSelected(current)

()

DVDHDD

19:00

4/3 (Sa)

Audio

RateMode

Media

EndStart

e.g.

Remaining volume

1) Press REC MENU.

The REC MENU appears.

2) Press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

3) Press / to select “Disc budget calculation”

then press ENTER.

The Disc budget calculation menu appears.

4) Press / to select a timer program, then

press ENTER or press ADJUST.

The recorder calculates on a bar graph how much

a specific program (identified by a check mark)

will occupy on the disc.

Pressing the ADJUST button can display or

remove the check mark.

Selected program Available disc space

When the entry item is marked X, the

recording does not fit. Change the setting.

Correcting a timer program

1) Press REC MENU.

The REC MENU appears.

2) Press / to select a timer program you want

to change, then press ENTER.

3) Press / to select an item, then press

ADJUST to set the item.

4) Press ENTER.

The modification is registered.

5) Press REC MENU to exit.

Important

•You cannot correct a timer program within 5 minutes before

the recording start time. You can only delete the timer

program.

Note

•You can program a timer recording whose start time has

already passed, unless the another program recording will

start within 5 minutes. The portion of the program before

the recording starts cannot be saved.

Elapsed programing (using past data for

programing)

1) Press REC MENU.

The REC MENU appears.

2) Press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

3) Press / to select “Elapsed programing”,

then press ENTER.

The “Elapsed programing” list appears.

4) Press / to select a program, then press

ENTER.

5) Press / to select an item to correct, then

press ADJUST to change the value.

6) When complete, press ENTER.

7) Press REC MENU to exit.

Note

•Up to 36 past programs are saved. Addition of a new one

deletes the oldest one.

Programming a recording (REC MENU) (Continued)

Recording

Deleting the past data for programming

1) On the REC MENU, press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Elapsed programing”,

then press ENTER.

The “Elapsed programing” list appears.

3) Press / to select a program to delete.

4) Press QUICK MENU, then / to select

“Elapsed programing delete”, and press

ENTER.

The selected data is deleted.

If you want to delete all data at once, select “All

elapsed programing delete”.

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

5) Correct the parameters of the timer program if

necessary.

(Skip to step 7 if you do not need this.)

You can change “Media”, “Mode”, “Rate” and

“Audio”.

Select an item you want to modify and press the

ENTER button. The item will be ready to be altered.

Press the ADJUST button to modify. When

complete, press the ENTER button.

You can adjust to a lower mode (SP to LP) and/or

lower the rate to reduce the quality of the recording,

and thus provide more disc capacity (space).

6) Press .

Program modification is registered.

7) Press REC MENU to exit the GUI.

Notes

•When a Reservation disc ( page 49) is inserted in the

recorder, you cannot check the remaining volume of other

discs.

•The nearest 8 programs are calculated at a time.

•While the recorder is preparing for or executing a

programmed recording, any program modification cannot

be registered. Only programs which will start after 5

minutes or later can be modified.

•Available disc volume is not displayed for a DVD-R/RW

disc on which DVD-Video finalize process was executed.

To stop a programmed recording

To finish,

Press on the front panel twice.

When you press it once, a message appears. While

the message is displayed, press the button once

again.

To pause recording,

Press on the front panel.

To resume recording, press it again.

Turning the power off automatically after

completing a programmed recording

1) While executing a programmed recording, press

QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

2) Press / to select “Auto power off” then

press ENTER.

Keeping the power on even after the

programmed recording finished

If the recorder turns itself on to execute a programmed

recording, it will turn itself off after finishing the

recording. You can restrict this and keep the recorder

powered on.

1) While executing a programmed recording,

press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Continuous power on”

then press ENTER.

Delaying the end time of a programmed

recording while it is recording

While a programmed recording has started, open

the lid of the remote control and press EXTEND.

The first press displays the programmed end time (in

the front panel display).

Each time you press the button, it is delayed 10

minutes, up to 60 minutes.

Notes

•Pressing a button except EXTEND in the above procedure

will set the currently selected delay.

•You cannot delay the end time of a programmed recording

which will end within 1 minute from the current time.

•Even if you delay the end time of a programmed recording,

the recording will stop when the disc is exhausted. Also it

will stop if 8 hours elapsed.

Recording

VIDEO Plus+ Recording

You can program a recording simply by entering the corresponding PlusCode® numbers.

Preparation

• Make sure that the recorder’s clock, receiving channels and their guide channels are set correctly ( page 28,

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).

•When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder.

– Load a disc which has space available to record the programme.

– Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected.

For satellite receiver users:

•Finish the set top box setting ( page 45, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”), and turn on the satellite receiver.

1Open the lid of the remote control, and press

VIDEO Plus+.

The “REC MENU Timer Programing” with the PlusCode

input window appears.

2Press the appropriate number buttons to enter

the PlusCode.

•Refer to newspapers or TV magazines to obtain

PlusCodes.

•To correct entered digits, press the CLEAR button to

erase them and press the number buttons to re-enter

again.

Note

•When you enter the number starting from 0, a 9-digit

number is entered.

3Press ENTER.

The entered program is highlighted.

VIDEO Plus+

123

456

789

ENTER

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

SETUP ENTER

T.SEARCH

CLEAR

312

REC MODE

EXTEND

TV CODE

456

DELETE

789

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

REC

QUICK MENU

ENTER

VIDEO Plus+

Open the lid.

CLEAR

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

REC

Timer Programing

1/ 1

CH Date

Exec

6.6

D/M2

HDD

4/10 (Sa)

6.6

D/M2

DVD

4/13 (Tu)

4.6

D/M1

HDD

--- ------ -- -- -- --

19:00

4/3 (Sa)

Audio

RateMode

Media

EndStart Disc

VIDEO PLUS+

PLUS CODE:

– – – – – – – – –

e.g.

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Notes

•The maximum timer program capacity is 32. Any new program will be rejected if the recorder is full. To enter a new program,

you must cancel an existing one ( page 43).

•Depending on the program, an actual recording may continue a few minutes longer than programmed.

•Entries made under the following conditions will be rejected.

– when an entry is for a non existing program.

– when the digit order of an entry is in error.

– when the guide channel has not yet been set.

• To erase a timer program, press the QUICK MENU button to display a Quick Menu on the REC MENU. For details, see

“Deleting a timer program” ( page 43).

•When recording onto a DVD-R/RW disc, set “DVD compatible mode” ( page 42) to the desired recording sound for each

timer program.

•In the event of a broadcast delay, the next program starts even if when the start time arrives prior to the end of the previous

program.

4Select an item by pressing / , then press

ADJUST ( /) to set the item, if necessary.

For details about items, see page 40.

To record a program from the connected satellite

recorder, keep the satellite receiver powered on.

5Press ENTER.

6To enter another program, repeat steps 1 to 5.

7After completing all your entries, press REC

MENU.

The REC MENU disappears.

To confirm your data, it is recommended to turn on the

REC MENU again.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

SETUP ENTER

T.SEARCH

CLEAR

312

REC MODE

EXTEND

TV CODE

456

DELETE

+10

789

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

REC

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

VIDEO Plus+

ENTER

REC MENU

ENTER

Recording

Others

Relay recording

This function automatically diverts a recording to the

HDD if a DVD-RAM disc is near capacity.

When the remaining time of the DVD-RAM disc has

reached about 10 minutes, the recorder starts

recording the same content on the HDD as well as

DVD-RAM. The chapter marks are automatically made

at the start and end points of the overlapped recording

portion. You can delete the unnecessary overlapped

portion afterwards by referring to the chapter marks.

To engage the Relay Recording function, set “Relay

recording” to “On” ( page 162).

Notes

•When the capacity of the HDD is not sufficient, the

operation is cancelled.

•While recording the overlapped portion, you cannot pause

the recording.

•While recording the overlapped portion, you cannot play a

recorded title on the same disc.

•When another programmed recording is set just after the

relay recording, the relay recording stops about 2 minutes

before the next programmed recording starts.

A–B recording

This function records one programme at the highest

possible rate onto a double sided DVD-RAM disc

(9.4GB) or 2 single sided DVD-RAM discs (4.7GB).

You can record a long programme with a clearer

picture on a DVD-RAM disc.

The A–B recording function records the first half of the

programme on the DVD-RAM disc and second half of

the programme on the HDD. After the recording, copy

the second half recorded on the HDD to the DVD-

RAM disc. You can create a DVD-RAM library that has

each half of a programme recorded at the highest

possible quality.

Notes

•For A–B recording, use a 12 cm DVD-RAM disc (4.7GB

single sided or 9.4GB double sided) that is formatted on

this unit just before recording. Do not use an 8-cm disc.

Check that the total available space of the HDD is sufficient

for the recording one DVD-RAM disc.

•DVD-RW/R discs are not available on the A-B recording.

To use the A–B recording function

At step 3 ( page 40), set “Media” to “A–B”. “Mode”

is automatically set to “Auto”.

When the timer setting is completed, “” illuminates

on the front panel display.

When recording starts

The same content is recorded on the HDD and the

DVD-RAM disc 10 minutes before the unit exchanges

the recording media.

Chapter marks are automatically made at the start and

end points of the overlapped recording portion, so you

can delete the unnecessary overlapped portion

afterwards.

If no DVD-RAM disc is loaded, or the loaded disc

contains recorded content, all of the recording is made

entirely on the HDD. The recording will contain one

title with a chapter mark at a dividing point.

During A–B recording, the picture quality mode is set

to “Auto” and the unit automatically calculates the

picture rate from the disc capacity. Even if the picture

rate is set to “Auto”, the picture quality of the A–B

recording is lower than that of the recording on the

HDD, because the unit adds 10 minutes of the

overlapped portion to the recording time for capacity

calculation. Therefore, the picture rate will remain

when the unit cannot record onto a DVD-RAM disc

and records on the HDD instead.

After recording

Copy the second half of the programme recorded on

the HDD to the alternate side of the double sided

DVD-RAM disc, or another single sided DVD-RAM

disc. See page 106 for dubbing operations. When

you want to delete the overlapped portion, perform the

procedure detailed on page 50 to delete the

overlapped portion either on the HDD or the DVD-

RAM disc.

If the entire programme has been recorded on the

HDD, copy both parts of programme onto both sides

of a blank double sided DVD-RAM disc or two single

sided DVD-RAM discs by referring to the chapter mark

at the dividing point.

HDD

DVD-RAM

HDD

DVD-RAM

Recording start

Recording end

10min.

DVD-RAM disc

HDD

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Reservation Disc (“Lock program record”)

This function is convenient when you wish to record

multiple serial related programs on the same disc.

The disc on which you write the reservation data is

called “Reservation Disc.” A Reservation Disc may

contain only one reservation.

Once a Reservation Disc is created, you cannot use

other discs to record the same serial program. The

Reservation Disc can be used only for recording a

program reserved for the Reservation Disc.

As an example, if you create a Reservation Disc for a

serial broadcast from 9 pm to 10 pm on Monday, then

you can use that disc only for that program. When you

attempt to make a reservation or record that serial, the

recorder will ask you to insert that Reservation Disc.

1) Load a DVD-RAM disc.

2) Press REC MENU.

The REC MENU appears.

3) Press / to select the program you want to

record.

Make sure that “Media” shows “DVD”.

4) Press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

5) Press / to select “Lock program record” then

“Yes” and press ENTER.

After the recording data is entered, a Reservation

disc icon appears on the REC MENU.

If the Reservation Disc is not loaded, the entry data

and icon are displayed in gray.

To cancel the Reservation Disc setting

Load the disc you want to cancel and select the

recording option on the REC MENU. Press the QUICK

MENU button to select “Unlock program record” then

“Yes”, and press the ENTER button.

To delete the information of a Reservation Disc

If you lose a Reservation Disc, delete the information

of the Reservation Disc.

Press the QUICK MENU button to select the program

of which data you want to delete, and press the

QUICK MENU button. Select “Program record unlock”

and then “Unlock selected program.”

If no programmed recording is set on the loaded disc,

press the QUICK MENU button to select “Program

record unlock” and then “Unlock prog. rec. disc”.

If you schedule a date for programmed recording on

the Reservation Disc, the recording information is

automatically deleted after the programmed recording

is completed.

To stop the Reservation Disc recording

Press the STOP button on the front panel once. The

message appears.

While it is displayed, press the STOP button again.

Recording stops.

If the start time of a programmed recording of a

Reservation Disc comes while recording

A recording start time has priority. The current

recording stops about 15 seconds before the start

time, and a recording of a Reservation Disc starts on

time.

e.g. When a start time of a programmed recording of a

Reservation Disc comes during recording on the HDD:

DVD-RAM

Not recorded.

11:00

(End)

10:00

(Start)

10:45:00

(Start)

10:44:45

11:55

(End)

HDD

Reservation Disc

To delete recorded content

Important note

Any deleted title/chapter (original) cannot be restored.

Before deleting, be sure to check contents on the disc.

1) Perform steps 1 and 2 in “Playing recorded

contents (CONTENT MENU)” ( page 55) to

select a title (chapter).

2) Open the lid of the remote control and press the

DELETE button.

Alternate method:

Press the QUICK MENU button, then press the

/ buttons to select “Title delete” (“Chapter

delete”) and press the ENTER button.

3) Read the message and press the / buttons

to select “Yes,” then press the ENTER button.

Notes

•Deleting a title (a chapter) decreases the numbers of the

succeeding titles (chapters).

•A chapter of about 5 seconds or shorter may not be

deleted. Deleting a short chapter may not change the

display of the available disc volume.

•Deleting a playlist ( page 87) title/chapter does not

affect the original title/chapter.

•Deleting an original ( page 87) title/chapter affects all

the corresponding playlist title/chapters.

•Deleting all chapters in a title erases the title itself.

•Title and chapter which contains still pictures cannot be

deleted.

•On a DVD-R/RW disc, deleting is not possible if the disc is

finalized ( page 132).

•Chapters in a DVD-R/RW disc cannot be deleted.

•

On a DVD-RW disc, only

a title last recorded can restore

the disc capacity by being deleted.

•

On a DVD-R disc, deleting cannot restore the disc capacity

ENTER

DELETE

/ / /

To protect recorded content

You can protect recorded content from unexpected

deletion.

Protection is provided for each title (original).

1) Perform steps 1 and 2 in “Playing recorded

contents (CONTENT MENU)” ( page 55) to

select a title.

2) Press the QUICK MENU button, and press the

/ buttons to select “Title information”. Then

press the ENTER button.

3) Press the QUICK MENU button, and press the

/ buttons to select “Lock” and then press

the ENTER button.

The mark appears.

Notes

•To cancel protection, repeat this procedure.

•Disc initialization erases all titles on a disc even if they are

protected.

•Executing “All HDD titles delete” ( page 163) erases all

titles on the HDD even if they are protected.

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

HDD

DVD-RAM

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Technical information

About recording time

The recording time of a typical VCR (Video Cassette

Recorder) is determined by the length of a video tape

and recording speed (SP, LP, etc.). Video tapes with

various recording times are available in the market.

On the other hand, the recording time of a DVD-RAM/

R/RW depends on the bit rate (Mbps: amount of data

transmitted per second), which can be varied in

MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group2)

compression technology.

As an example, when you pour water into a bucket

from a faucet, the faster the water flows, the sooner

the bucket is filled with water. On the other hand, the

slower the water flows, the more slowly the bucket is

filled. The DVD-RAM/R/RW is, so to speak, such a

bucket, and the degree you turn the faucet is bit rate,

the time required to fill the bucket with water is the

recording time available for a disc. The higher you set

the bit rate (making much more water flow), the

sooner a disc is filled. Consequently, the recording

time becomes shorter. The lower you set the bit rate,

the longer time it takes to fill a disc.

About picture quality (SP, LP, Auto, MN(Manual)

mode)

The higher you set the bite rate, the more the volume

of information for the picture. The lower the bit rate,

the less the volume of picture information.

However a high bit rate does not always mean that the

picture quality is high. The difference between the 1.4

Mbps and 9.2 Mbps is obvious, but when comparing

similar bit rates, the difference may be insignificant.

Generally when you set the bit rate low for longer

recording time, the data volume shortage will result in

a lack of detail information. As a result, the picture

quality is decreased (more noticeable with dynamically

moving images). For example, square noises (block

noise) may occur in a scene with fast action or a

scene with light and shadows, such as a water

surface.

This recorder has a two settings, 2 hour recording at

“SP” mode or 4 hour recording at “LP” mode (both

assume a blank 4.7 GB DVD-RAM). It is

recommended to consider the “SP” mode as a

standard mode and use the “LP” mode when you want

to record for long time regardless of the picture quality.

If you want to record for about 2 hours or are uncertain

which one to select, select the “Auto” mode.

On a blank 4.7 GB DVD-RAM disc, the “Auto” mode

automatically sets the appropriate bit rate

corresponded to the recording time from about 1 hour

to up to 2 and a half hours so that you can achieve the

best picture quality. If a part of a DVD-RAM disc has

already been recorded, the “Auto” mode sets the bit

rate suitable for the remaining space on the disc. (The

picture quality is determined referring the remaining

space just before recording. When the remaining

space is scarce in the disc, the picture quality may

decrease from what you set beforehand or the

recording may stop halfway.) “Auto” mode is available

also on DVD-R/RW recordings.

When you want to record a music program or

animation with high picture quality, it is recommended

that you select the “MN” mode. If you select more than

6 Mbps, you can usually record with considerably

higher picture quality. However the higher you set the

bit rate, the shorter the recording time.

D /M1, D /M2

Sound recording format onto DVD-RAM discs. When

recording, sounds are converted into digital signals

and compressed. In playback, they are extracted to

the original sound. The standard differenciates D /

M1 and D /M2 in data volume to use. D /M1

and D /M2 are applied the digital recording

technology for consumer products of Dolby

Laboratories. Dolby Digital 192 kbps is set for D /

M1 and Dolby Digital 384 kbps for D /M2.

L-PCM (Linear PCM)

Sound recording format, like Dolby Digital. However,

sounds are converted into digital signals and recorded

as they are without compression. This process

requires more data than Dolby Digital.

Playback

Play your favorite contents.

Information on playback

Playing recorded contents

(CONTENT MENU)

Playing a DVD video disc

Pausing a TV broadcast to

resume later

Playing a TV programme

currently being recorded

Playing at various speeds

Locating by entering the number

Watching a TV broadcast in the

sub window (P in P Playback)

Selecting the camera angle

Selecting Subtitles

Zooming a picture

Selecting the sound

Viewing JPEG files

Playing MP3/WMA Files

Checking the current status and

settings

Functions in the Quick Menu

Playback

Information on playback

The operation procedure depends on the kind of disc. See the respective pages for basic procedure to

play the disc.

To play contents recorded onto the HDD or DVD-RAM discs

Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) ( page 55)

To play a DVD video disc

Playing a DVD video disc ( page 60)

To play a DVD-R/RW disc

DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder

Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) ( page 55)

DVD-R/RW discs recorded on other devices

Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) ( page 55)

Playing a DVD video disc ( page 60)

DVD-R/RW discs recorded in DVD-VR mode

Playing a DVD-RW disc recorded in DVD-VR mode ( page 59)

To switch the drive to play

Press the STOP button to stop playback. Then press the HDD or DVD button to select the drive.

To switch the picture to view TV broadcasts

Press the STOP button to stop playback.

To start recording

Press the STOP button to stop playback.

Then press the HDD or DVD button to select a recording media, and press the REC button to start recording.

Screen Protection

If you pause playback or display a menu and leave it still for about 15 minutes, the recorder switches the output

picture source to a TV broadcast or connected equipment.

A still picture may be displayed after all titles are played. In this case, the screen protection activates after about 10

seconds.

Notes

•Do not move the recorder during playback. It may damage the disc.

•Occasionally the picture may stop at the last scene, or the main menu may appear after playing.

If you display a still picture such as the main menu on the TV screen for a prolonged period, the TV may be damaged (image

burn). To prevent this, press the STOP button to stop playback.

•A still picture for about 15 minutes while the TIMESLIP indicator illuminates, will return to normal playback. If the playback is

completed, a still picture of the title end will continue unless you press the TIMESLIP button.

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU)

Titles and chapters recorded on the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc are displayed in thumbnail view, so

that you can easily locate a desired one.

1During stop or playback, press CONTENT

MENU.

The “CONTENT MENU Title List” appears.

You can switch between HDD and DVD drives by

pressing the HDD or DVD button.

2Press / / / to select a title (chapter).

You can view succeeding or prior pages by pressing the

PICTURE SEARCH ( / ) button.

To select a chapter, select a title and press the

button.

The Chapter List appears.

By pressing the button again, you can return to the

Title List.

3Press ENTER.

Playback starts from a selected title (chapter).

Attribution

(original/playlist)

page 87

e.g.

Notes

•In a CONTENT MENU, titles (Original) precede titles (Playlist), in order from the oldest one respectively.

•To turn off the CONTENT MENU, press the CONTENT MENU button. Absence of operations for longer than about 15

minutes also turns off the CONTENT MENU.

•The mark is displayed in every thumbnail when “HDD/RAM title play” ( page 160) is set to “Title resume”. When set to

“Serial playback”, it is displayed in a thumbnail last operated.

•You can change a thumbnail picture. See page 100.

•You cannot display the CONTENT MENU for DVD-R/RW discs recorded on other devices.

•For playing a recorded title while recording another, see page 36.

•A black thumbnail with “Recording” means that the title is being recorded or its recording will start within 15 seconds. This

thumbnail cannot start playback.

Playback

CONTENT MENU

ENTER

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

HDD

Original

001:

2004/06/08 7:00

Ch:4

Title List Page

CONTENT

1/ 2

(0:53:45) Original

2004/06/08 23:00

Ch:6(0:29:50)

Original

2004/07/11 7:00

Ch:8(0:54:30)

Original

2004/07/12 21:00

Ch:10 (0:51:28)

Original

2004/06/12 19:00

Ch:3(0:52:40)

Original

2004/07/12 23:00

Ch:4(0:30:08)

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

QUICK MENU

PICTURE SEARCH

SKIP

Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (Continued)

Playback

To stop playback

Press STOP.

To pause playback (still playback)

Press PAUSE.

To resume normal playback, press the PLAY button or

the PAUSE button.

Note

•Sound is muted during still mode.

Resuming playback from the location last

stopped (Title resume)

The recorder memorizes the location you last stopped

playback to resume there.

To use this function, set “HDD/RAM title play” (

page 160) to “Title resume.” The recorder will

memorize the location you last stopped at in each title,

so you can resume playback there. For example, if

there are 6 titles, you can start each of them as if you

had stored 6 video tapes in the recorder.

•To return to the beginning of the title

During playback, press the QUICK MENU button,

then press the / buttons to select “Restart title,”

then press the ENTER button.

•To play another title

Press the CONTENT MENU button to display

“CONTENT MENU Title List,” then select a title.

You can make the recorder memorize only the very

last point, regardless of the number of titles. Set

“HDD/RAM title play” ( page 160) to “Serial

playback.”

•To return to the beginning of the title

Press the SKIP ( ) button repeatedly until the

beginning of the title appears.

•To play the other title

Press the SKIP ( / ) button repeatedly.

Notes

•Depending on the status or the contents, playback may not

start from the location last stopped, but instead another

location. For example, from the beginning of the disc or

title.

•Depending on the disc, there may be a slight difference

between the location the recorder memorized and the

actual location where playback starts.

•This function is not available on DVD-R/RW discs.

•The resuming function will not work if the write-protect tab

is set to “PROTECT” ( page 8).

Playing the digest (Skip search)

This feature repeats playback of about 5 seconds and

skip of 1 minute from the beginning to the end of a

recorded title, so that you can view the digest of it.

1) Perform steps 1 and 2 on page 55, and

select a title that you want to view the digest.

2) Press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu is displayed.

3) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,

then press ENTER.

4) Press / to select “Skip search”, then press

ENTER.

The Skip Search starts.

Notes

•This feature can be used only one title (original) recorded

on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.

•While using this feature, you cannot use speed-related

functions such as fast forward or fast reverse.

•If you press the ENTER button while using this feature, the

normal playback starts.

•To cancel this feature, press the STOP button twice.

STOP

PAUSE

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Viewing the first scenes of titles (Original)

(Intro scan)

1) After step 1 on page 55, press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,

then press ENTER.

3) Press / to select “Intro scan”, then press

ENTER.

The recorder plays the first 5 seconds of each title

beginning from title 1.

You can go forward or back by pressing the SKIP

buttons.

: to go to the next title.

: to go back to the current title.

Press twice to go back to the previous title.

4) When you find a desired title, press ENTER.

The selected title is played.

Notes

•To stop Intro Scan, press the STOP button twice.

•This feature can be used only titles (Original) recorded on

the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.

Playing all titles (Original/Playlist) in a disc

Set “HDD/RAM title play” ( page 160) to “Serial

playback”. You can play all titles in the HDD and DVD-

RAM disc in the order of the thumbnails on the

CONTENT MENU, as if they were recorded in one

video tape.

Playing all titles (Original) in a disc

(Play All ORG Titles)

You can play all Original titles in the HDD or a DVD-

RAM disc in the order of the thumbnails on the

CONTENT MENU, as if they were recorded in one

video tape.

1) During stop, press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,

then press ENTER.

e.g.

3) Press / to select “Play all ORG titles”, then

press ENTER.

e.g.

Playback starts from the beginning of title 1.

Notes

•To stop “Play all ORG titles”, press the STOP button twice.

(However, doing this when you are playing a title recorded

in the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc while recording ( page

36) will stop the recording.)

Alternatively, press the QUICK MENU button to display the

quick menu, and press the / buttons to select “Cancel

play all ORG titles” and press the ENTER button.

•When the last title is complete, All ORG Title Play stops.

•If you select “Repeat all ORG titles” at step 3), “Play all

ORG titles” repeats.

•This function is available only for titles recorded on the

HDD or DVD-RAM discs.

Quick Menu

Bit rate

Special playback mode

Disc management

DVD compatible mode

Aspect ratio(Video mode)

DVD-Video:CHP create

Exit

AV record quality

Intro scan

Skip search

Repeat all ORG titles

Play all ORG titles

Quick Menu

Bit rate

Special playback mode

Disc management

DVD compatible mode

Aspect ratio(Video mode)

DVD-Video:CHP create

Exit

AV record quality

Intro scan

Skip search

Repeat all ORG titles

Play all ORG titles

Changing the order of the titles

You can change the order or sort the titles by genre.

1) Press CONTENT MENU.

The CONTENT MENU appears.

2) Press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

3) Press / to select “Display changeover”,

then press ENTER.

4) Press / to select the item, then press

ENTER.

•Arrange

The titles are rearranged along with the selected

order.

Press the / buttons to select the order, then

press the ENTER button.

•Sort by genre

Titles of the selected genre are sorted.

Press the / buttons to select the genre, then

press the ENTER button.

•Original

Titles (Original) are sorted.

•Playlist

Titles (Playlist) are sorted.

Note

•The recorder holds your selection until the power is turned

off. To cancel, select “Display changeover” then “Cancel

Arrange/Narrowing” from the Quick Menu.

Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (Continued)

Playback

Checking the background information on a

selected title

1) At step 2 on page 55, select a title (chapter)

then press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

2) Press / to select “Title information”, then

press ENTER.

Detailed information of a selected title (chapter)

appears. You can switch the chapters in the title by

pressing the PICTURE SEARCH ( / )

buttons.

Notes

•From the Quick Menu on the “CONTENT MENU Title

Information”, you can change the details such as name,

genre or time, which will help sorting and searching on

Library system ( page 140).

Also you can protect the title from unexpected erasure

( page 50).

•To return to the previous display, press the button.

•To cancel the procedure, press the CONTENT MENU

button.

HDD

Original

Title List Page

CONTENT

1/ 2

(0:53:45) Original

(0:29:50)

Original

(0:54:30)

Original

(0:51:28)

Original

(0:52:40)

Original

(0:30:08)

HDD :

2004/06/08 7:00

Ch:42004/06/08 23:00

Ch:6

2004/07/11 7:00

Ch:8

2004/07/12 21:00

Ch:10

2004/06/12 19:00

Ch:3

2004/07/12 23:00

Ch:4

e.g.

Quick Menu

Title information

Create thumbnail

High speed dubbing

Rate conversion dubbing

Chapter function

Edit functon

Special playback mode

Save chaptures images

Disc information

Display changeover

Specific page jump

Title delete

Exit

Arrange

Sort by genre

Original

Playlist

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Jumping to a specified page

1) Press CONTENT MENU.

The CONTENT MENU appears.

2) Press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

3) Press / to select “Specific page jump”, then

press ENTER.

4) Enter the page number you want by pressing

ADJUST, / or the number buttons.

To clear the number, press the CLEAR button.

5) Press ENTER.

The specified page appears.

Playing a DVD-RW disc recorded in DVD-VR

mode

See page 55.

Notes

•Some disc’s conditions or discs which contain copy once

contents may not permit proper playback.

•“Title resume” ( page 160) is not available.

HDD

Original

Title List Page

CONTENT

1/ 2

(0:53:45) Original

(0:29:50)

Original

(0:54:30)

Original

(0:51:28)

Original

(0:52:40)

Original

(0:30:08)

HDD :

2004/06/08 7:00

Ch:42004/06/08 23:00

Ch:6

2004/07/11 7:00

Ch:8

2004/07/12 21:00

Ch:10

2004/06/12 19:00

Ch:3

2004/07/12 23:00

Ch:4

e.g.

Specific Page Jump

Page Number – – –

Playback

Playing a DVD video disc

You can also play VIDEO CDs, audio CDs or finalization processed DVD-R/RW discs in the same manner.

To play recorded contents, follow the instructions on page 55.

Preparation

•Turn on a TV or audio system and select the corresponding input source that the recorder is connected to.

•Load a disc you want to play. ( page 20)

1Press DVD.

The DVD indicator on the front panel illuminates.

This status indicates that the recorder is ready to play a

disc in the disc tray (DVD mode).

2Press PLAY.

Playback starts.

•Depending on the disc, playback starts automatically

by loading the disc.

•The recorder may take a short time to start playback.

This occurs because the recorder is reading the data

of a disc.

To stop playback

Press STOP.

To pause playback (still playback)

Press PAUSE.

To resume normal playback, press the PLAY button or

the PAUSE button.

Note

•Sound is muted during still mode.

Note

•DVD video disc provides high resolution pictures and a lot of information. Because of this, you may notice some fine picture

noises on TV screen, which you have never seen with regular broadcast TV programme. While the amount of noise depends

on the TV you use with the recorder, you should generally reduce the sharpness adjustment on your TV when viewing DVD

video discs.

STOP

PAUSE

PLAY

DVD

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

ENTER

REMAIN

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

STOP

PAUSE

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Resuming playback from the location last

stopped (Resume Play)

You can resume playback from the location where you

stopped.

If you press the PLAY button after stopping playback,

playback resumes from the location you have stopped.

If you stop playback by pressing the STOP button

twice, the resume playback feature will be cancelled.

Notes

•Resume feature cannot function when:

–you select a disc menu language ( page 154) or change

the parental lock setting ( page 155).

–you play a PBC-featured VIDEO CD while “PBC” ( page

156) is set to “On”.

–you open the disc tray.

–you cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process of a DVD-RW

disc.

•There may be a difference in the location where playback

resumes depending on the disc.

•While the recorder retains a location in memory, initial

setting changes with GUI may function only after the

memory is cleared.

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

Locating a title using the top menu

Some DVD video discs may include a top menu, on

which you can view the structure of contents or select

a scene. Most of the top menus automatically appear

in certain scenes, and also are displayed on demand.

Actual operation of the top menu depends on the disc.

This section explains a general example of how to

operate a top menu. Also refer to the instructions of

the disc itself.

1) Press TOP MENU.

2) Press / / / to select the title you want.

If the titles in the top menu are assigned a number,

you can directly locate a specific title by pressing its

designated number with the number buttons.

3) Press ENTER.

Notes

•The instructions above describe basic procedures which

may vary depending on the contents of the DVD video

disc. If different instructions appear on the TV screen,

follow those instructions.

•If you display the top menu during playback and press the

TOP MENU button again without selecting any title, the

recorder may resume playback from the point where you

first pressed the TOP MENU button. (depending on the

actual DVD video disc.)

•This method of locating a title is available only on a disc

that contains a top menu.

•Instruction notes of discs may refer to the button that

displays the top menu as the TITLE button.

ENTER

TOP MENU

/ / /

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

DVD-R

Playback

Pausing a TV broadcast to resume later

This function enables you to pause a TV broadcast and resume viewing at a later, more convenient time,

by storing the TV broadcast temporarily on the HDD.

While viewing a TV broadcast via this recorder

or immediately before it starts, press TIMESLIP

The current picture pauses.

The recorder begins to store the broadcast on the HDD

the moment you press the TIMESLIP button.

Resume playback by pressing PAUSE or PLAY

•You can confirm how far you are from the current

broadcast by pressing the TIME BAR button.

•Playback may not resume immediately after you press

the PLAY or PAUSE button.

3Locate a scene you want by the following

methods.

Fast-forward/fast-reverse:

Press the PICTURE SEARCH button.

Forward/reverse slow-motion:

Press the SLOW button.

Forward/reverse frame by frame play:

First press the PAUSE button then press the FRAME button.

•To resume normal playback, press the PLAY button.

•You can play in fast-forward to within 10 seconds prior to the

current broadcast.

4Press TIMESLIP to exit this mode.

The recorder stops storing the broadcast on the HDD.

A message appears and asks you whether you will save

the stored data or erase it.

Press the / buttons to select, then press the ENTER

button.

Notes

•This function is not available during recording.

•Pause TV recording stops when the HDD is filled up. It will not begin if the HDD is full.

•While using this pause TV recording, you cannot program a recording.

•Playback may jump a few seconds back or pause depending on the disc or data condition.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

TIME BAR

FRAME

SLOW

PICTURE SEARCH

TIMESLIP

PAUSE

PLAY

TIMESLIP

HDD

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

IntroductionPlayback

Playing a TV programme currently being recorded

You can begin playback from the beginning of a programme currently being recorded.

You will find this function of great advantage on long programmes, as you do not have to wait for the

end of recording to begin playback.

HDD

DVD-RAM

1While recording a TV programme on the HDD

or a DVD-RAM disc, press TIMESLIP.

The recorder displays a TV program as it is being

recorded.

2Go back to the beginning of the TV program

using SKIP.

When you go back to the beginning, playback starts

automatically.

You can confirm how far you are from the current

broadcast by pressing the TIME BAR button.

3Locate a scene you want through the

following operations if necessary.

Fast-forward/fast-reverse:

Press the PICTURE SEARCH button.

Forward/reverse slow-motion:

Press the SLOW buttons.

Forward/reverse frame by frame play:

First press the PAUSE button then press the FRAME button.

•To resume normal playback, press the PLAY button.

•You can play in fast-forward to within 10 seconds prior to the

current broadcast.

4Press TIMESLIP to exit.

The current broadcast returns.

Notes

•Time slip recording/playback stops when the disc is filled up. You can play up to a location where the recorder stopped the

recording. The time slip recording/playback cannot begin if the disc is full.

•The playback picture may appear after a delay of several seconds.

•The playback location will never be identical to the record location in the programme. It will always trail the record location by

a few seconds.

•While using time slip recording/playback, you cannot program a recording.

•While the TIMESLIP indicator is on, you cannot change the setting of the feature that turns off the recorder after a

programmed operation has finished.

•Even while “Auto power off” is selected, the recorder does not turn off if the recording end time comes during playback of a

programme being recorded.

•This function is not available on a DVD-RAM disc while the A-B recording is executing or when “Relay recording” is set to

“On.”

•Playback may jump a few seconds back or pause depending on the disc or data condition.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

TIME BAR

PLAY

PAUSE

FRAME

SLOW

PICTURE SEARCH

TIMESLIP

Playing at various speeds

Playback

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Playing in fast reverse or fast forward

1During normal playback, press PICTURE

SEARCH.

: Fast forward playback

: Fast reverse playback

Each time you press the button, the playback speed

changes.

During fast forward playback at “” speed, sound is

reproduced. (Not available on VIDEO CD.)

•This function is not available when you play a title

recorded on a DVD-RAM disc while recording

another.

Notes

•The playback speed may vary depending on the disc.

•Depending on the disc or data condition, picture and sound

in fast forward playback at “ ” speed may be disturbed.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

To skip the contents in pre-determined

increments

During playback, press INSTANT SKIP.

Each time you press the button, you can skip by the

specified time.

You can select the interval per press of the button.

See “Instant skip interval” ( page 160).

To skip by 1/20 of whole

During playback, press / .

Each time you press the button, you can skip by 1/20

of the current title or track if it is longer than 1 minute.

Time bar display

Fast-forward or fast-reverse playback automatically

displays a time bar.

e.g.

For details, see page 81.

To skip back in pre-determined increments

During playback, press INSTANT REPLAY.

Each time you press the button, you can go back by

the specified time to resume playback.

You can select the interval per press of the button.

See “Instant replay interval” ( page 160).

Notes

•Some discs may not permit this operation.

•Depending on disc structure, some operations may be

limited.

•Depending on playback status, some operations may not

work.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

QUICK MENU

ENTER

REMAIN

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INSTANT REPLAY

PLAY

INSTANT SKIP

00:00:00 Location 00:00:24:05F 00:00:40

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Skipping to the next/previous chapter or track

1Press SKIP ( /) repeatedly until the

chapter or track number you want appears.

Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.

: Playback starts from the beginning of the next

chapter or track.

: Playback starts from the beginning of the current

chapter or track.

When you press twice, playback starts from the

beginning of the previous chapter or track.

Notes

•Some titles may not display chapter numbers.

•When playing the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, you can access chapters only in the current title if “HDD/RAM title play” (

page 160) is set to “Title resume”. To access chapters in other titles, set to “Serial playback”.

•When playing a DVD video disc or a DVD-R/RW disc, you can locate chapters only in the current title if “DVD title stop” (

page 156) is set to “On”. To access chapters in other titles, set to “Off”. However, in this instance even though you press the

SKIP button ( ) to go back to the previous title, playback starts not from the last chapter of the title but from the first

chapter.

Playing in slow-motion

1Press SLOW during playback.

: Forward slow-motion

: Reverse slow-motion

Each time you press the SLOW button, the slow-motion

speed changes.

Notes

•Slow-motion does not provide smooth playback.

•When playing a VIDEO CD, reverse slow-motion playback

is not available.

•The speed level displayed is approximate.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

QUICK MENU

ENTER

PLAY

NAVI

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ENTER

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-VIDEO

VCD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Playing frame by frame

1During playback, press PAUSE.

A still picture is displayed.

2Press FRAME ( / ).

: Playback direction

: Opposite direction

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY or PAUSE.

Notes

•Sound is muted during frame by frame playback.

•Frame by frame playback cannot provide smooth playback.

•Picture may advance more than 1 frame at a time.

•Depending on the scene, some frames may not be played.

•When playing a VIDEO CD, reverse frame by frame

playback is not available.

Viewing still pictures (Playing a disc that contains still pictures)

1Press PLAY.

The first still picture on a disc is displayed.

Some DVD video discs may allow you to change the

pictures using the PLAY, ENTER or SKIP button.

2Press FRAME ( / ).

: Displays the next still picture.

: Displays the previous still picture.

PAUSE

DVD-VIDEO

VCD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

QUICK MENU

ENTER

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P i P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

PLAY

NAVI

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

QUICK MENU

ENTER

Playing at various speeds (Continued)

Playback

DVD-VIDEO

DVD-RAM

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Locating by entering the number

Playback

Locating by entering the number of a desired section

Normally titles, chapters, and tracks are numbered. By entering these numbers, you can access a desired section.

1Press T.SEARCH.

If you are using a VIDEO CD/audio CD, skip step 2.

e.g.

2Press / to select a section (title or chapter)

you want to locate.

e.g. When you want to locate a chapter.

3Press the number buttons to enter a number

of the section.

e.g. To enter 25, press “2”, then press “5”.

4Press ENTER.

Playback starts from the selected location.

Notes

•Pressing the CLEAR button resets the numbers. To clear the display, press the T.SEARCH button several times (depending

on the disc).

•This method of locating a title is available only on a disc that contains title numbers.

•If a title is erased, the numbers of the following titles decrease respectively.

•When you record a new title (Original) on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, it is added prior to current titles (Playlist), and each

following title (Playlist) reference number will advance by a factor of 1.

ENTER

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

T.SEARCH

ENTER

123

456

789

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

SETUP ENTER

T.SEARCH

CLEAR

312

REC MODE

EXTEND

TV CODE

456

DELETE

789

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

REC

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

VIDEO Plus+

Open the lid.

CLEAR

Title

0001Chapter 001

0001

001

Title

Chapter

Locating a specific point by entering its elapsed time (Time Search)

1Press T.SEARCH.

You may have to press repeatedly, depending on the

disc. Press the button until the following display

appears.

e.g.

2Press the number buttons and / to enter

the desired time location on the disc.

e.g. To enter 1 hour, 25 minutes, and 30 seconds

“0” → “1” → “ ” → “2” → “5” → “ ” → “3” → “0”

hour minute second

3Press ENTER.

Playback starts from the selected location.

Notes

•Some discs may not respond to this process.

•Some scenes may not be accessed precisely as you specified.

•This method for accessing specific locations is available only within the current title of the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW/DVD

video disc or within a current track of a VIDEO CD/audio CD.

•Pressing the CLEAR button resets the numbers.

ENTER

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

SETUP ENTER

T.SEARCH

CLEAR

312

REC MODE

EXTEND

TV CODE

456

DELETE

789

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

REC

QUICK MENU

ENTER

VIDEO Plus+

Open the lid.

CLEAR

T.SEARCH

123

456

789

ENTER

001

00 00 00

Title

Time

Locating by entering the number (Continued)

Playback

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Watching a TV broadcast in the sub window (P in P Playback)

During playback, you can watch a TV broadcast in the sub window. (P in P : Picture in Picture)

Playback

1During playback, press P in P.

A sub window (programme on the air or on the

recording) appears.

e.g.

2Press / / / to select the position of the

sub window.

You can shift the sub window in following 4 directions.

↑ / ↓ / ← / → is the moving range.

To turn off the sub window, press the P in P button.

Notes

•You can change the channel of the sub window by pressing the CHANNEL / button.

•The P in P function is available only during playback.

•You cannot swap the playback picture with the picture within the sub window, or change the audio settings.

•Press the P in P button during “Chase Play” or “Pause TV”, the actual broadcast appears on the sub window in real time.

•If this function is stopped after shifting the sub window, before you press the P in P button again, the sub window will appear

in the last position you set. However, if you turn off the power, the sub window re-appears in the lower right (default) position.

DVD-VIDEO

VCD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

ENTER

P in P

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

CHANNEL

Playback

DVD-VIDEO

Selecting the camera angle

If the scene was recorded with multiple angles, you can easily change the camera angle of the scene you

are watching.

Angle

1Press ANGLE while playing a scene recorded

with multiple angles.

While playing a scene recorded with multiple angles, the

angle icon appears on the TV screen and on the front

panel. Press the ANGLE button while the angle icon is

displayed.

e.g.

2Press ADJUST while the angle number is

displayed on the TV screen.

You can also select the camera angle by pressing the

ANGLE button several times.

•The angle icon disappears after about 3 seconds if no

further selections are made.

Notes

•You can also change the camera angle during still playback. The camera angle changes to the new setting when you resume

normal playback.

•If you pause a picture immediately after changing a camera angle, the resumed playback picture may not display the new

camera angle.

•Depending on the disc, the camera angle may not change even though the angle number changes.

To turn off the angle icon

Set “On screen display” in the setup menu to “Off” ( page 159).

Most of the on-screen display including the angle icon will not appear.

While the angle icon is flashing on the front panel display, you can change the camera angle.

ANGLE

Angle

Angle icon

Total number of angles

Current selection

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Selecting Subtitles

You can display subtitles on the TV screen and select a subtitle language from those included on the

disc.

Playback

Good evening!

Bonsoir!

1Press SUBTITLE during playback.

The current subtitle setting appears.

e.g.

The language code appears instead of the language

name. Refer to the list of languages and their

abbreviations. ( page 171)

2Press to select “Status,” then press ADJUST

to select “On.”

Skip to step 3 if “On” is already displayed.

3Press to select “Subtitle,” then press

ADJUST to select a language.

The subtitles of recorded languages appear.

The display turns off after about 3 seconds if you do not

make a selection.

Notes

•Some DVD video discs are set to display subtitles

automatically.

•Depending on the scene, subtitles may not appear

immediately after you set the subtitle function to on.

•Some DVD video discs will allow you to change subtitle

languages and turn subtitles on or off only via the disc

menu.

To turn the subtitles on or off

At step 2, select “Off” by pressing the ADJUST

button.

SUBTITLESUBTITLE

ENTER

DVD-VIDEO

VCD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

Subtitle

Status 1– –

Off

Setting number and language

Playback

Zooming a picture

You can magnify areas within a picture.

1Press ZOOM.

A zoom scope appears.

e.g.

2Select a zoom point and magnification level.

Raises the magnification level.

Lowers the magnification level.

/ / / :

Moves the zoom point. (only after the image has been

magnified)

CLEAR :

Returns the zoom point to the center of the picture.

Notes

•Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.

• During some scenes, the buttons may not work as described.

• The zoom feature is canceled when the disc menu is operated.

• The magnification level varies depending on the picture size you select

( page 50, in “INSTALLATION GUIDE”).

• The zoom feature is not available while displaying a GUI.

• The zoom feature is canceled when you stop playback or start playback.

To cancel the zoom

Press ZOOM.

DVD-VIDEO

VCD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

ZOOM

ENTER

CLEAR

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SETUP ENTER

T.SEARCH

CLEAR

312

REC MODE

EXTEND

TV CODE

456

DELETE

789

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

VIDEO Plus+

Open the lid.

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Selecting the sound

You can select a preferred language and a sound format.

Playback

Sound

Output 1PCM 2ch

English

1Press AUDIO during playback or while

receiving a broadcast.

The current audio setting appears.

The language code appears instead of the language

name. Refer to the list of languages and their

abbreviations. ( page 171)

2Press ADJUST while the audio setting is

displayed on the TV screen.

Variation of channels depends on the disc or the type of

TV broadcast.

•

HDD

DVD-RAM

, TV channel signals

Stereo sound

→ “Stereo” (left channel and right channel)

→ “Stereo L” (left channel)

→ “Stereo R” (right channel)

(→ Back to “Stereo”)

Dual Mono sound (NICAM)

“Dual L” → “Dual R” → “Dual LR” (→ Back to “Dual L”)

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

DVD-R

Language name / sound recording system / No. of

channels

e.g.

•

VCD

“Stereo” → “Stereo L” → “Stereo R” (→ Back to “Stereo”)

The display turns off if you do not operate for more than

3 seconds.

If you press the / buttons to select “Output,” you can

select the audio output setting ( page 158) by using

the ADJUST button.

AUDIO

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

DVD-VIDEO

VCD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Recorded sounds

According to your setting of “NICAM” on the setup menu screen, ( page 158), the sound is recorded onto different

channels of the disc below. Set “NICAM” to “On” or “Off” appropriately.

Setting on the setup screen Type of receiving broadcast Contents of recorded sound Type of record

DVD Compatible Mode NICAM Lch Rch

Off Off Mono + NICAM L, R Mono Mono Stereo

Mono + NICAM M1, M2 Mono Mono Stereo

Mono + NICAM M1 Mono Mono Stereo

Mono Mono Mono Stereo

On Mono + NICAM L, R L R Stereo

Mono + NICAM M1, M2 M1 M2 Dual Mono*

Mono + NICAM M1 M1 M1 Stereo

Mono Mono Mono Stereo

On (Mode I) Off Mono + NICAM L, R Mono Mono Stereo

Mono + NICAM M1, M2 Mono Mono Stereo

Mono + NICAM M1 Mono Mono Stereo

Mono Mono Mono Stereo

On Mono + NICAM L, R L R Stereo

Mono + NICAM M1, M2 M1 M1 Stereo

Mono + NICAM M1 M1 M1 Stereo

Mono Mono Mono Stereo

On (Mode II) Off Mono + NICAM L, R Mono Mono Stereo

Mono + NICAM M1, M2 Mono Mono Stereo

Mono + NICAM M1 Mono Mono Stereo

Mono Mono Mono Stereo

On Mono + NICAM L, R L R Stereo

Mono + NICAM M1, M2 M2 M2 Stereo

Mono + NICAM M1 M1 M1 Stereo

Mono Mono Mono Stereo

Selecting the sound (Continued)

Playback

* This will be “Stereo” when a recording is made with “L-PCM” selected.

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Notes

•Some discs allow you to change audio selections only via the disc menu. If this is the case, press the MENU button and

choose the appropriate language from the selections on the disc menu.

•When you turn on the recorder or replace a disc, the recorder returns to the initial default setting. ( page 154)

Depending on the disc, the sound that is specified the disc is played back.

•Immediately after you have switched sounds, there may be a temporary discrepancy between the display and actual

sound.

•The BITSTREAM/PCM jack may not output NICAM Mode I/II sound you select. In this instance, set “Audio out select” to

“PCM”.

( page 158)

•You cannot change NICAM sound if recorded with “DVD compatible mode” ( page 162) set to “On”. Even when “DVD

compatible mode” ( page 162) is set to “Off,” the recorder regards it as “On (Mode I)” when recording to a DVD-R/RW

disc.

Output sound conversion table

Linear

PCM

48 kHz/16 bit

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/24 bit

96 kHz/16 bit

96 kHz/20 bit

96 kHz/24 bit

Bitstream Analog 2ch PCM

*“DVD video disc” above does not include DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder.

•Do not select a connection or setting indicated as “Noise” in the above list.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

BITSTREAM/

PCM jack

Bitstream

48 kHz/16 bit

Bitstream

44.1 kHz/16 bit

Bitstream

48 kHz/16 bit

Bitstream

48 kHz/16 bit

Bitstream

Analog (L/R)

jacks

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/16 bit

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/24 bit

48 kHz/16 bit

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/24 bit

—

48 kHz/16 bit

44.1 kHz/16 bit

(Noise)

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/16 bit

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/16 bit

BITSTREAM/

PCM jack

Bitstream

48 kHz/16 bit

—

Bitstream

44.1 kHz/16 bit

Bitstream

48 kHz/16 bit

Bitstream

48 kHz/16 bit

Bitstream

Analog (L/R)

jacks

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/16 bit

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/24 bit

96 kHz/16 bit

96 kHz/20 bit

96 kHz/24 bit

—

48 kHz/16 bit

44.1 kHz/16 bit

(Noise)

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/16 bit

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/16 bit

BITSTREAM/

PCM jack

48 kHz/16 bit

—

48 kHz/16 bit

44.1 kHz/16 bit

Bitstream

48 kHz/16 bit

Analog (L/R)

jacks

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/16 bit

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/24 bit

48 kHz/16 bit

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/24 bit

—

48 kHz/16 bit

44.1 kHz/16 bit

(Noise)

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/16 bit

48 kHz/20 bit

48 kHz/16 bit

Audio setting ( page 158) and output in the default setting display

Disc

DVD-

video

disc*

VIDEO CD

Audio

HDD

DVD-RAM/

R/RW

CD-R/RW

Sound format

Dolby Digital

DTS

MPEG2

MPEG1

Linear PCM 44.1 kHz/16 bit

DTS

Dolby Digital

Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit

Dolby Digital

Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit

MPEG2

MP3/WMA 44.1 kHz or 32 kHz or 48 kHz / 16 bit

Viewing JPEG files

You can play JPEG files that have been recorded on a CD-R or CD-ROM on the recorder.

Playback

Preparations

•Prepare a compatible disc ( page 77) that contains JPEG files you want to view.

•Set “Priority contents” ( page 160) to “Photo”.

•Make your TV shape conform to the 4:3 picture size. Only 4:3 pictures can be played regardless of the function

settings via the on-screen displays of the recorder ( page 50, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”). If the TV is adjusted

to other sizes, e.g. “WIDE,” images will appear to be horizontally expanded. For details, refer to the owner’s

manual of your TV. 1Press DVD.

2Load a CD that contains JPEG files.

Each photo appears for about 3 seconds (slide show).

If a slide show does not start, press the PLAY button.

Depending on the disc, the “CONTENT MENU Picture

List” appears. See “On the “CONTENT MENU Picture

List”” ( page 77) to operate.

DVD

OPEN/CLOSE

To stop playback (slide show)

Press STOP.

If you press the PLAY button after pressing the STOP

button, playback will start from the photo you stopped.

To pause playback (slide show)

Press PAUSE.

To resume, press the PAUSE button again or press

the PLAY button.

To skip photos

During playback, press the SKIP button repeatedly.

: To skip forward.

: To skip backward.

To rotate a picture

Press ANGLE repeatedly.

Each time you press the button, the picture rotates by

90° degree.

Notes

•The rotated image is displayed after its original posture

appears momentarily.

To magnify a picture

Follow the procedure on page 72.

Notes

•The magnified image is displayed after its original posture

appears momentarily.

•For small pictures, the reduction level may be limited.

Notes

•Some files may not display their own entire images depending on the size.

•JPEG picture playback is not available during recording on the HDD.

•Operation to JPEG file will be disabled at about 5 minutes before a programmed recording starts.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

REC

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Viewing a specified photo (single view)

Full screen still view.

2 ways are available:

On the “CONTENT MENU Picture List”

1) Press CONTENT MENU.

The “CONTENT MENU Picture List” appears.

Depending on the disc, the recorder creates either

temporary folder, “Auto” or “All”.

“Auto”: For CD of which compatibility confirmed by

TOSHIBA. Only playable files are listed.

“All”: For CD other than above. All files are listed.

• Some CDs may not comply with the above.

2) Press / / / to select a folder or photo.

Pressing the PICTURE SEARCH ( /) button

turns the pages.

If you press the button, the list changes to

thumbnail view (“CONTENT MENU Pictures”).

Pressing the ANGLE button rotates the picture. The

rotation of pictures is kept until the CD is ejected.

To return to the previous list, press the button

again.

3) Press ENTER.

If you select a folder at step 2), repeat steps 2) and

3) until your favorite file appears.

The selected photo appears in full screen.

Notes

•The “CONTENT MENU Picture List” cannot show all the

files in a disc, but only ones regarded as objects of regular

play of the disc.

•The larger the file size is, the longer the thumbnail takes

time to appear.

•Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space

are not displayed.

JPEG files compatibility

Discs whose compatibility with this recorder has been

confirmed by TOSHIBA are as follows.

CANON QuickCD

FUJICOLOR CD

Kodak Picture CD

NORITSU QSS CD

JPEG disc compatibility with this recorder is limited as

follows:

•Playable discs:

CD-ROM, CD-R

CD-RW is not recommendable.

•CD physical format:

Mode 1, Mode 2 XA Form 1

•File system:

ISO9660 Level 1, 2 or Joliet

•File name:

A file name should be in alphabet and

numerals only, and must incorporate “JPG”

extension.

e.g.“********.JPG”

•Total number of folders:

Less than 256

•Total number of files:

Less than 1000

Some files may not display their own entire image

depending on the size.

Some discs may not permit this operation. Especially,

the following conditions of included files will increase

the disc’s disability.

1. Pixels over 5000 x 5000 in height and/or width

2. File format except Exif

Direct input of a photo number

1) During playback or stop, press T.SEARCH.

An input window appears.

2) Input a photo number using the number buttons

or ADJUST.

3) Press ENTER.

The selected photo appears in full screen.

To change the playback order

1) During playback (slide show) or stop, press

QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select an item, then press ENTER.

To shift the cursor, press the / buttons.

Reverse : To reverse the order.

Repeat : To repeat the current folder.

3) Press ENTER.

Playback in the selected mode starts.

001

Photo

e.g.

Picture List Page CD

CONTENT

001

DH100001

004

DH100004

007

DH100003

010

DH100006

DH100009

016

DH100012

019

DH100015

022

DH100018

002

DH100002

Auto

005

DH100001

008

DH100004

011

DH100007

014

DH100010

017

DH100013

020

DH100016

023

DH100019

003

DH100001

006

DH100002

009

DH100005

012

DH100008

015

DH100011

018

DH100014

021

DH100017

024

DH100020

1/ 3

013

File number

If you select this icon and press the ENTER button,

upper folders appear.

e.g.

Picturs Page CD

CONTENT

/ / JPEG

1/ 8

e.g.

Picture List Page

CONTENT

001

DH100001

004

DH100004

007

DH100003

002

DH100002

All

005

DH100001

008

DH100004

003

DH100001

006

DH100002

009

DH100005

1/ 3

e.g.

Playing MP3/WMA files

You can play MP3/WMA files that have been recorded on a CD-R or CD-ROM on this recorder.

Playback

Preparations

•Make sure that a disc you want to play is compatible with this recorder. See page 79.

•Set “Priority contents” ( page 160) to “Audio”.

1Press DVD.

2Load a CD that contains MP3/WMA files.

Playback starts from the first track of a current folder.

If playback does not start, press the PLAY button.

DVD

OPEN/CLOSE

To stop playback

Press STOP.

If you press the PLAY button after pressing the STOP

button, playback will start from the the beginning of the

track.

To pause playback

Press PAUSE.

To resume, press the PAUSE button again or press

the PLAY button.

To skip tracks

During playback, press SKIP repeatedly.

: To skip forward.

: To skip backward.

Selecting a track in the disc

2 ways are available:

On the “CONTENT MENU Audio List”

1) Press the CONTENT MENU button.

The “CONTENT MENU Audio List” appears.

Notes

•WMA tracks copy-protected cannot be played.

•The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT BITSTREAM/PCM jack outputs MP3/WMA sounds in the linear PCM format regardless of the

current “Audio out select” ( page 158) selection.

•You cannot change the playback speed of MP3/WMA playback.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

REC

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

Audio List Page CD

CONTENT

MP3

1/ 1

001

MP3_0001

004

MP3_0004

007

MP3_0007

010

MP3_0010

002

MP3_0002

005

MP3_0005

008

MP3_0008

011

MP3_0011

003

MP3_0003

006

MP3_0006

009

MP3_0009

012

MP3_0012

File number

Current folder

If you select this icon and press the ENTER button,

upper folders appear.

e.g.

Audio List Page CD

CONTENT

MP3

JPG_MP3 All

1/ 1

MP3c

MP3a MP3b

002

MP3_0002

003

MP3_0003

001

MP3_0001

004

MP3_0004

e.g.

Disc name The recorder creates temporary

folder “All”, which contains all

playable files.

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Playable files

MP3/WMA disc compatibility with this recorder is

limited as follows:

•Playable discs:

CD-ROM, CD-R

CD-RW is not recommendable.

•Sampling Frequency / Bitrate:

WMA: 32 kHz / 48 kbps (CBR), VBR

44.1 kHz / 48-192 kbps (CBR), VBR

48 kHz / 128-192 kbps (CBR), VBR

MP3: 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12kHz, 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz / 8-160 kbps (CBR),

VBR

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz / 32-320 kbps

(CBR), VBR

•CD physical format:

Mode 1, Mode 2 XA Form 1

•File system:

ISO9660 Level 1, 2 or Joliet

•File name:

A file name should be in alphabet and

numerals only, and must incorporate “MP3” or

“WMA” extension.

e.g.“********.MP3”, “********.WMA”

•Total number of folders:

Less than 256

•Total number of files:

Less than 1000

•WMA codec version:

V7, V8, V9

* This recorder supports ID3v2 (ID3 Tag Version 2) of MP3,

to display text data such as names of title and artist.

Some characters may be displayed properly.

This recorder requires discs/recordings to meet certain

technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback

quality. Pre-recorded DVDs are automatically set to

these standards. There are many different types

of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing

MP3/WMA files). Given the fact that technology in this

area is still maturing, Toshiba cannot guarantee that all

genre of recordable discs will produce optimal playback

quality. The technical criteria set out in this owner’s

manual are meant as a guide only.

Customers should also note that permission is required in

order to download MP3/WMA files and music from the

internet. Toshiba has no right to grant such permission.

Permission should always be sought from the copyright

owner.

Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows

Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks

of Microsoft Corporation in both the United

States and other countries.

001

Track

e.g.

Quick Menu

Special playback mode

Exit

Memory

Memory list

Folder repeat

Track repeat

Track random

e.g.

2) Press / / / to select a track or folder.

Pressing the PICTURE SEARCH ( / ) button

turns the pages.

3) Press ENTER.

If you select a folder at step 2), repeat steps 2) and

3) until your favorite file appears.

Notes

•The “CONTENT MENU Autio List” cannot show all the

tracks in a disc, but only ones regarded as objects of

proper play of the disc.

•Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space

are not displayed.

Direct input of a track number

1) During playback or stop, press T.SEARCH.

An input window appears.

2) Input a track number using the number buttons

or the ADJUST button.

3) Press ENTER.

To change the playback order

1) During playback or stop, press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,

then press ENTER.

3) Press / to select an item, then press ENTER.

Memory list : To play favorite tracks only in

a favorite order.

Input a track number by using the number buttons

or the ADJUST button.

To shift the cursor, press the / buttons.

Folder repeat : To repeat the current folder.

Track repeat : To repeat the current file.

Track random : To play files in the current

folder in a random order.

Notes

•To cancel these modes, stop the playback or select the

cancel command from the Quick Menu.

1Press DISPLAY.

The following on-screen display appears. (The actual

display varies depending on the disc.)

e.g. while playing a DVD-RAM disc

2Press DISPLAY again.

An expanded display appears.

(Actual display varies depending on the disc.)

e.g.

3Press DISPLAY again to turn the display off.

Operational status and setting details

Checking the current status and settings

You can confirm operational status and setting details.

Playback

DISPLAY

Title No./

Chapter No.

Status display

Mode indicator

Elapsed time of a title/

Elapsed time of a chapter

Playback

mode

Operating disc

Receiving

channel

e.g.

DISPLAY

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

002:

00:10:29

00:05:15

0005:Stereo

Title

repeat DVD

Title

Chapter

Virtual surround

Picture Quality

Audio Quality

Audio

Audio Output

Subtitle

Off

1 Stereo R Original

Bitstream

– – – Off

002:

-00:22:01

-00:00:07

0005:Stereo

Title

repeat DVD

Title

Chapter

D/M1

Remaining time

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Using the time bar

The time bar shows the current progress in playback or recording.

1During playback or recording, press

TIME BAR.

The time bar appears. (The actual display varies

depending on the disc.)

e.g. Playback

e.g. Recording

Locator (Shows the current location.)

Elapsed time Total playing time of a current title

(In the case of a VIDEO CD or

audio CD, it shows the total

playing time of the disc.)

Elapsed recording time (per 30 minutes)

(Recording end time if it comes within 30

minutes.)

Elapsed time

Locator (Shows the current location.)

TIME BAR

Changing the location of the time bar

While the time bar is displayed, press / .

The time bar shifts up and down.

Turning off the time bar

Press TIME BAR.

Note

•Time display is an approximation.

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

QUICK MENU

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

01:30:0000:00:00

00:30:0000:00:00

00:55:00:00FLocation

00:18:00Location

Chapter division

Functions in the Quick Menu

Besides these examples, various other ones are introduced on respective pages for your convenience.

See page 24 on how to operate the Quick Menu.

Playback

To play repeatedly (Repeat playback)

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

You can repeat a desired section.

1) During playback, press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,

then press ENTER.

Special playback mode

The sub-menu appears. Select the next item by

pressing the / buttons and the ENTER button.

A-B repeat

You can designate a portion in a title or track to repeat

continuously.

If you select “A-B repeat” and press the ENTER

button, the following display appears. Perform steps 1

and 2 below.

e.g.

To cancel the procedure, press the button.

1) Press ENTER at the beginning of the segment

(point A) you want to repeat.

The location of point A is memorized.

The display changes to “Set B”.

2) Press ENTER at the end of the segment

(point B).

The location of point B is memorized, and repeat

playback begins between point A and B.

Title repeat

To repeat the same title.

Chapter repeat

To repeat the same chapter.

Track repeat

To repeat the same track.

Disc repeat

To repeat the entire disc.

Repeat all ORG titles

To repeat all original titles in a disc.

Repeat all PL titles

To repeat all playlist titles in a disc.

Cancel repeat

(in Repeat playback

mode)

To resume normal playback.

Playback of the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc stops.

Notes

•Some discs may not permit repeat operation.

•You cannot use the repeat playback function in conjunction

with the random playback function.

•If you press the STOP button during repeat playback, this

operation is canceled.

•While you are performing repeat playback on the HDD or a

DVD-RAM disc, other operations ( pages 64 to 66)

except pause play are not available.

To play in random order (Random play)

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-R

You can play sections in random order.

1) During playback or stop, press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,

then press ENTER.

Special playback mode

The sub-menu appears. Select the next item by

pressing the / buttons and the ENTER button.

Title random

Plays all titles in a loaded disc in random order.

Each title is played beginning from chapter 1.

Chapter random

Plays all chapters in a current title in random order.

Track random

Plays all tracks on a loaded disc in random order.

repeat Set A

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Cancel random (in Random play mode)

Resumes normal playback.

Notes

•Some discs may not permit random playback operation.

•You cannot use the random playback function in

conjunction with the memory playback function.

•You cannot use the random playback function in

conjunction with the repeat playback function.

•Pressing the STOP button during operation cancels

random playback.

To play in favorite order (Memory playback)

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-R

You can select 30 titles, chapters, or tracks and play

them in favorite order.

(To play contents in the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc in

favorite order, make a playlist. For details, see

“Editing” on page 86.)

1) During playback or stop, press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,

then press ENTER.

Special playback mode

The sub-menu appears. Select the next item by

pressing the / buttons and the ENTER button.

Memory list

If you select this and press the ENTER button, the

following display appears. Perform the steps below.

e.g.

1) Input numbers of titles, chapters, or tracks by

using the number buttons, in favorite order.

Input each 3-digit number.

To input a 1- or 2-digit number, first input 0.

(e.g. “0”, “0”, “3”.)

To cancel the numbers, press the CLEAR button.

To input a chapter number, press the / buttons

to shift the cursor.

2) Press / to select the next box, then perform

step 1).

To select another chapter in the same title, you do

not need to select the title number.

Repeat these steps if necessary.

You can program up to 30 selections into memory.

3) Press ENTER.

Memory playback starts.

Memory

(in normal playback

mode)

To display an entry box for one program selection.

Memory release

(in memory playback

mode)

To resume normal playback.

Memory repeat

(in memory playback

mode)

To repeat a current memory playback.

Notes

•Some discs may not permit memory playback operation.

•Inputting numbers of titles, chapters or tracks that a disc

does not contain will result in error.

•You cannot program/change selections during memory

playback. To change selections, cancel memory playback

by pressing the STOP button.

•When you turn off the power, the selected memory is

erased.

•You can exit the memory playback display by pressing the

O button.

01 T CT 11 T CT 21 T CT

02 T CT 12 T CT 22 T CT

03 T CT 13 T CT 23 T CT

04 T CT 14 T CT 24 T CT

05 T CT 15 T CT 25 T CT

06 T CT 16 T CT 26 T CT

07 T CT 17 T CT 27 T CT

08 T CT 18 T CT 28 T CT

09 T CT 19 T CT 29 T CT

10 T CT 20 T CT 30 T CT

Functions in the Quick Menu (Continued)

Playback

To display the current bit rate

DVD-VIDEO

VCD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

1) During playback, press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Bit rate”, then press

ENTER.

Bit rate

Note

•To turn off the bit rate display, select this item again.

To check information on a title

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

1) During playback, press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Title information”, then

press ENTER.

Title information

To exit the Quick Menu

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Press QUICK MENU again.

Press / to select “Exit”, then press ENTER.

Exit

Editing

You can create your own movie from your assembled

scenes. Save your favorite videos in DVD discs.

Before editing

Creating chapters

Playlist editing

Creating thumbnails

Before dubbing

High speed Library dubbing

Dubbing selected items

Rate conversion dubbing

Line-U dubbing

Deleting selected items

Combine Original titles

Creating a DVD-Video using

DVD-R/RW

DVD-Video finalizing process

DV recording

Before editing

Be sure to read before performing any editing.

Editing

For better use the HDD of this recorder

When you save necessary scenes from recorded contents, it may not be a good method to delete unnecessary

portions from a recorded title in the HDD, then copy the remainder to a DVD-RAM disc.

Repeating this method increases blank spaces in the HDD, on which contents will be recorded discontinuously

(fragmentation in the HDD), resulting in slowdown of the system or incomplete deleting operation, in the worst case,

the system may refuse any commands for play or recording, to protect the damaged HDD.

To delete unnecessary scenes from a title to save, first make a Playlist (virtual title) by collecting necessary scenes,

then copy the Playlist to change it into a new title, finally delete the original one. This method is more simple and can

save your time and reduce possibility of such fragmentation troubles of the HDD.

To avoid HDD fragmentations, it is also recommended that you execute periodically deletion of all titles in the HDD or

initialization of the HDD. Before initializing the HDD, be sure to copy necessary contents to DVD-RAM discs, because

initializing erases all data in the HDD. Library ( page 140) data are also recorded in the HDD. If you do not want to

erase them, copy them into DVD-RAM discs before initializing the HDD. Load the backup DVD-RAM disc into the

recorder after initializing the HDD, copy the data back to the HDD.

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Editing is executed by a title and a chapter. Titles and chapters are classified into “Original” and “Playlist.” First, specify

a desired scene by dividing a title (Original) into chapters. Then compile the necessary chapters (Original) in desired

order by programming a Playlist. Then dub (copy) the Playlist on the same disc. This creates a title (Original).

Refer to the following examples about “Playlist” and “Original.”

Example: Creating your own music compilation by collecting songs from music programmes you record from

Monday to Friday.

You can create one title for one recording.

In the example above, five titles are created, as you recorded programmes five times from Monday to Friday. The

content you recorded is called “Title (Original)”

All chapters in a title (Original) are chapters (Original).

Specify the range (a favorite song) you need in

each title (Original).

To specify the range, create a chapter. A segment of

a song becomes one chapter by creating divisions in

a chapter at the beginning and end of a song. In the

example to the right, three chapters (Original) are

created in one title (Original).

Basic steps of editing

Creating chapters ➔Programming a Playlist ➔Dub (Copy) the Playlist (this will create an Original

title of the desired scenes)

Editing on this recorder

Monday

Segment of

songs

Original title 1

(including one Original chapter)

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Monday

Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3

Division of chapter Division of chapter

Title (Original) 1

(including three chapters (Original))

Before editing (Continued)

Editing

These virtual titles or chapters are called “Title (Playlist)” or “Chapter (Playlist)” respectively.

In order to differentiate titles (Playlist) from titles (Original), an Original is displayed on screen as “ORG” and a Playlist

is displayed as “PL”.

Compile chapters in a desired order.

You can select any chapter or order of chapters, as

you want. Also you can assign a title to multiple

chapters.

Each element to be compiled is called a part. In the

example to the right, the three chapters in

Wednesday, Friday, and Monday are the parts.

When compiled, the source chapter (Original)

remains as it is in the title (Original).

A new part is not created by copying the source

chapter (Original). It does not contain actual recorded

content but only exists as an informational sub-set of

the chapter name and the playback order (in the right

example, the chapter names are “Monday,

Wednesday, and Friday” and the playback order is

“Wednesday→Friday→Monday”).

For actual playback, the contents of the source

chapter (Original) are played. Basically, it is a list for

the recorder to go and find the content.

You can create a part from the Original as many

times as you want and you can make different titles

with the same parts by changing the combination or

order.

For parts, you can use not only chapters like in the

example, but also titles (Original) and other Playlist.

You can play the actual recorded content, such as titles (Original) and chapters (Original), or by managing the

Originals and parts, you can virtually create a variety of titles without increasing the use of disc space.

2 3

Monday

Title (Original) 1

(including three chapters (Original))

Title (Playlist) 1

(including three chapters (Playlist))

When title (Playlist) 1 is played, ,

and are played in order.

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Chapter 1

Chapter

(Playlist) 1

Chapter

(Playlist) 2 Chapter

(Playlist) 3

Chapter 2 Chapter 3

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Make the compiled chapters into a title (Original).

(Dubbing)

If you just want to play the compiled chapters in

desired order, you only play the Playlist. If you want to

delete a title (Original) which contains unnecessary

chapters, be sure to dub (copy) the Playlist and make

it into a title (Original).

You are now converting the virtual file (playlist) into an

actual file that will become a new Original file.

Notes

•A title (Playlist) or a chapter (Playlist) is based on a title (Original) or a chapter (Original). Therefore changing or deleting a

title (Original) or a chapter (Original) will affect the related title (Playlist) or chapter (Playlist).

•Some recorded content cannot be edited (for example, a title including still images).

•The boundary of the title with unnecessary part deleted and titles (Playlist) having different parts cannot be played back

seamlessly (without break).

Proceed to the practical operations.

See “Creating chapters” ( page 90) and “Playlist editing (Collecting desired scenes)” ( page 95).

For the dubbing procedure, see “High speed Library dubbing” ( page 106).

Title (Playlist) 1

Title (Original) 1

Dubbing (Copying)

Playlist

Title

Chapter

(Original) 1

Chapter

(

Original

) 2

Chapter

(

Original

) 3

Chapter

(Playlist) 1

Chapter

(Playlist) 2 Chapter

(Playlist) 3

Creating chapters

A recording makes 1 title, which includes 1 chapter. By dividing it into several chapters, it will be easier

to access a desired scene, and your editing or playback will be much easier.

1During stop, playback or recording, press

CONTENT MENU.

The “CONTENT MENU Title List” appears.

Pressing the HDD or DVD button can switch the drives.

2Press / / / to select a title.

•To go to the next or previous page, press the

PICTURE SEARCH ( / ) button.

•To select a chapter, first highlight the title that contains

the chapter you want, then press the button.

The display changes to “CONTENT MENU Chapter

List”.

To go back to the title display, press the button

again.

3Press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

To create chapters in a title, insert a chapter mark. Playback the content, locate a point where you want to divide, then

press the CHP DIVIDE button. You can insert a chapter mark also while recording, by pressing the CHP DIVIDE

button. (A chapter will also be placed in the recording when you pause.)

The point divides the chapter (into two). You can create multiple chapters by repeating the above operation.

Notes

•Chapters cannot be created in the following modes:

Dubbing / Fast-reverse, Fast-forward / Slow-motion

•You cannot divide a title of a DVD-R/RW disc into chapters. It is possible to create chapters in a DVD-R/RW disc by pressing

the CHP DIVIDE button during recording at the desired points, or by selecting an option that inserts chapter marks

automatically during recording at regular intervals. ( page 162)

If you want to modify the chapter division, or want to place a chapter mark more precisely monitoring the

frame counter, follow the procedures below.

Editing

CONTENT MENU

ENTER

QUICK MENU

HDD

DVD-RAM

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

PICTURE SEARCH

HDD/DVD

HDD

Original

Title List Page

CONTENT

1/ 2

(0:53:45) Original

(0:29:50)

Original

(0:54:30)

Original

(0:51:28)

Original

(0:52:40)

Original

(0:30:08)

HDD :

2004/06/08 7:00

Ch:42004/06/08 23:00

Ch:6

2004/07/11 7:00

Ch:8

2004/07/12 21:00

Ch:10

2004/06/12 19:00

Ch:3

2004/07/12 23:00

Ch:4

e.g.

Quick Menu

Title information

Create thumbnail

High speed dubbing

Rate conversion dubbing

Chapter function

Edit functon

Special playback mode

Save captured images

Disc information

Display changeover

Specific page jump

Title delete

Exit

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

4Press / to select “Chapter function”, then

press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

5Press / to select “Chapter editing”, then

press ENTER.

The EDIT MENU Chapter Editing display appears.

6Press PLAY to start playback.

Locate a scene where you want to insert a chapter mark.

You can use the following buttons.

PICTURE SEARCH, SLOW, SKIP, PAUSE,

FRAME/ADJUST, etc.

The locator shows the current position on the time bar.

And the live video plays in the upper left.

•To access other chapters:

Press the / buttons to move to the thumbnail

display, then press the / buttons to select a

desired thumbnail.

To go to the next page, press the PICTURE SEARCH

button.

•You can confirm the first and last scenes of a chapter.

Select a thumbnail and press the ENTER button.

3 seconds of the first and last scenes are played.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

SKIP

PAUSE

FRAME

SLOW

PICTURE SEARCH

ENTER

PLAY

00:54:30

00:00:00:03F

00:00:00

4:3

Chapter Editing

Original

Aspect Ratio

Location

To create new chapter, select

desired start point via remote.

To set, press enter.

Divide

Title:004 Chapter:0001

HDD

EDIT

Fishing Guide

e.g.

HDD

Original

Title List Page

CONTENT

1/ 2

(0:53:45) Original

(0:29:50)

Original

(0:54:30)

Original

(0:51:28)

Original

(0:52:40)

Original

(0:30:08)

HDD :

2004/06/08 7:00

Ch:42004/06/08 23:00

Ch:6

2004/07/11 7:00

Ch:8

2004/07/12 21:00

Ch:10

2004/06/12 19:00

Ch:3

2004/07/12 23:00

Ch:4

e.g.

Quick Menu

Title information

Create thumbnail

High speed dubbing

Rate conversion dubbing

Chapter function

Edit functon

Special playback mode

Save captured images

Disc information

Display changeover

Specific page jump

Title delete

Exit

Chapter editing

Auto chapter create

7At a point where you want to make a chapter

division, press PAUSE.

The picture pauses.

8Press / / / to select “Divide,” then press

ENTER.

A chapter division is created at the selected location,

and the first scene of the new chapter is registered as a

chapter thumbnail.

9Repeat steps 6 to 8.

Locations of chapter division are indicated by the markers on the

time bar.

To erase a chapter division, see “Merging chapters” ( page 94).

When all chapter divisions have been made,

press .

The recorder displays a message, and starts saving the

chapter divisions on the time bar.

When complete, the CONTENT MENU returns.

PAUSE

ENTER

Creating chapters (Continued)

Editing

00:54:30

00:00:21:24F

00:00:00

4:3

Chapter Editing

Original

Aspect Ratio

Location

To create new chapter, select

desired start point via remote.

To set, press enter.

Divide

Title:004 Chapter:0001

HDD

EDIT

Fishing Guide

e.g.

00:54:30

00:00:21:24F

00:00:00

4:3

Chapter Editing

Original

Aspect Ratio

Location

To create new chapter, select

desired start point via remote.

To set, press enter.

Divide

Title:004 Chapter:0001

HDD

EDIT

Fishing Guide

e.g.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Notes

•This recorder supports a limited number of chapters on a

disc. If exceeded, a message appears. In this event,

reduce the number of chapters by merging chapters. (

page 94)

•The “EDIT MENU Chapter Editing” can also be viewed by

selecting “Chapter Editing” from the “EDIT MENU Main

Menu”.

•To exit the “EDIT MENU Main Menu”, press the EDIT

MENU button.

• Making chapters in a title (Original) does not affect the

related titles (Playlist).

•There may be a small difference between a location you

marked and a chapter division actually played.

•Pausing a recording automatically creates a chapter

division.

•During relay recording ( page 48), a chapter division is

automatically created at the start point of relay record.

•During an A-B recording ( page 48), if the recorder

has to record all content onto the HDD, a chapter division

is automatically created at a point that corresponds to the

beginning of side of a DVD-RAM disc.

•If you create chapters in a title which is stored in the HDD

and copy the title to a DVD-R/RW, the chapter divisions

may shift.

Creating chapters automatically when

recording

You can create chapter marks from the beginning of

a title at regular intervals automatically. (Chapter

marks are added to those already existing.)

This is convenient for long programs, such as live

sports games.

1) Perform steps 1 to 4 on pages 90 to 91.

2) Press / to select “Auto chapter create”,

then press ENTER.

3) Press / to select a chapter division

interval, then press ENTER.

Chapter divisions are automatically marked at the

selected intervals.

Editing chapter break

You can adjust positions of chapter marks. You can

shift the beginning of a chapter currently selected.

1) Perform steps 1 to 5 on page 90 to 91.

2) Press QUICK MENU.

3) Press / to select “Chapter break edit

mode”, then press ENTER.

4) Press / to select the item, then press

ENTER.

“by frame (VR mode)”

The chapter mark shifts by one frame.

For contents which will be copied to DVD-RAM

discs.

“by GOP (Video mode)”

The chapter mark shifts by a GOP (about 0.5

second), which is a unit of editing in DVD-Video

format.

For contents which wiil be copied to DVD-R/RW.

5) Press / to select a chapter whose

beginning you want to shift.

6) Press FRAME (II / II) repeatedly until a

desired scene appears.

Select a point while monitoring the thumbnail,

which changes as you press the button.

To operate other chapters, press the / buttons

to select another, then follow the above steps.

7) When complete, press QUICK MENU, and

select “Chapter break edit mode off (by

frame)” or “Chapter Break Edit Mode off (by

GOP)” then press ENTER.

The recorder exits the adjusting mode.

Notes

•You cannot shift a chapter mark beyond the adjacent

chapter marks or a logical gap on recorded data within a

chapter.

•Shifting a chapter mark restores a thumbnail to the

beginning of a chapter. This may occur also on the

previous chapter depending on the data condition.

5432

Main Menu

Chapter Editing

Chapters can be divided on frame

basis. Chapters can be merged and

assigned names.

Title

Merge

Divide

Source

Edit Functions

Dub Selected Items

Rate Conv. Items

Combine ORG Title

DVD-Video Creation

Del Selected Items

DVD-Video Finalizing

Playlist Editing

Chapter Editing

DV Recording

HDD

e.g. EDIT

Merging chapters

1) Perform steps 1 to 5 on pages 90 to 91, to

view the EDIT MENU Chapter Editing display.

2) Press / / / to highlight a chapter.

Pressing the PICTURE SEARCH button can

access preceding or following pages.

3) Press QUICK MENU.

4) Press / to select an item.

Merge with previous cptr:

To delete the chapter division between the selected

chapter and the previous one.

Merge with following cptr:

To delete the chapter division between the selected

chapter and the succeeding one.

Merge all chapters:

To merge all chapters in the title.

5) Press ENTER.

e.g. When “Merge with previous cptr” is selected:

The selected chapter is merged into the previous

chapter and its thumbnail is erased.

Notes

•To turn off the “EDIT MENU Main Menu”, press the EDIT

MENU button.

•When chapters are merged, the numerical value of

following chapters will decrease correspondingly.

•Merging chapters does not affect the related titles

(Playlist). You can also merge chapters in the title (Playlist).

In this case, the title (Original) is not affected.

•You can access the feature of merging chapters also from

the Quick Menu on the “CONTENT MENU Chapter List”.

Naming a chapter

1) From the “EDIT MENU Chapter Editing”, select

a chapter which you want to name.

2) Press QUICK MENU.

3) Press / / / to select “Edit Chapter

Name”, then press ENTER.

A keyboard appears.

Enter a name following the on-screen icon guides.

Notes

•There is a limit to the number of chapters which can be

named. If exceeded, a message appears.

•You can also access the keyboard to enter a chapter name

by selecting a chapter with the PICTURE SEARCH button

on the “CONTENT MENU Title Information”, and by

selecting “Edit chapter name” from the Quick Menu on the

“CONTENT MENU Chapter List”.

•You can change chapter names also on a DVD-R/RW disc,

if the disc is not finalized yet.

Creating chapters (Continued)

Editing

00:54:3000:00:00

Chapter Create

00:00:00:03F

4:3

Original

Aspect Ratio

Location

To create new chapter, select

desired start point via remote.

To set, press enter.

Divide

2003/06/10 17:09 Ch:3

Title: 002 Chapter: 0004

HDD

EDIT

MENU Quick Menu

Chapter break edit mode

Merge with previous cptr

Merge with following cptr

Merge all chapters

Auto chapter create

Exit

Edit chapter name

e.g.

00:54:3000:00:00

Chapter Editing

00:00:00:03F

4:3

Original

Aspect Ratio

Location

To create new chapter, select

desired start point via remote.

To set, press enter.

Divide

2003/06/10 17:09 Ch:3

Title: 002 Chapter: 0004

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Playlist editing (Collecting desired scenes)

Create a “Playlist” to omit unnecessary scenes for dubbing, or compile desired scenes.

Editing

1During stop, playback or recording, press

CONTENT MENU.

The “CONTENT MENU Title List” appears.

Pressing the HDD or DVD button can switch the drives.

2Press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

3Press / to select “Edit function”, then

press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

(Continued)

HDD

DVD-RAM

CONTENT MENU

QUICK MENU

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

HDD/DVD

ENTER

HDD

Original

Title List Page

CONTENT

1/ 2

(0:53:45) Original

(0:29:50)

Original

(0:54:30)

Original

(0:51:28)

Original

(0:52:40)

Original

(0:30:08)

HDD :

2004/06/08 7:00

Ch:42004/06/08 23:00

Ch:6

2004/07/11 7:00

Ch:8

2004/07/12 21:00

Ch:10

2004/06/12 19:00

Ch:3

2004/07/12 23:00

Ch:4

e.g.

Quick Menu

Title information

Create thumbnail

High speed dubbing

Rate conversion dubbing

Chapter function

Edit functon

Special playback mode

Save captured images

Disc information

Display changeover

Specific page jump

Title delete

Exit

HDD

Original

Title List Page

CONTENT

1/ 2

(0:53:45) Original

(0:29:50)

Original

(0:54:30)

Original

(0:51:28)

Original

(0:52:40)

Original

(0:30:08)

HDD :

2004/06/08 7:00

Ch:42004/06/08 23:00

Ch:6

2004/07/11 7:00

Ch:8

2004/07/12 21:00

Ch:10

2004/06/12 19:00

Ch:3

2004/07/12 23:00

Ch:4

e.g.

Quick Menu

Title information

Create thumbnail

High speed dubbing

Rate conversion dubbing

Playlist editing

Original title combination

Playlist(Mon-Fri)

Playlist(everyweek)

Chapter function

Edit functon

Special playback mode

Save captured images

Disc information

Display changeover

Specific page jump

Title delete

Exit

Playlist editing (Continued)

Editing

4Press / to select “Playlist editing”, then

press ENTER.

The “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing” appears.

Press / / / to select a title or chapter

To select between titles and chapters, press the button

6Press ENTER.

A cursor appears, indicating the point where the

selected item will be inserted.

Cursor

ENTER

Playlist Editing Source:Title

Object :Title

Original

PlayList

StartTitle: Entire Time:

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

AAA

Playlist Editing Source:Title

Object :Title

Original

PlayList

StartTitle: Entire Time:

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

AAA

Playlist Editing Source:Title

Object :Title

Original

PlayList

StartTitle: Entire Time:

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

7Press / to select a point where you want to

insert the item, then press ENTER.

If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor

to the left and press the ENTER button.

The selected part is inserted at the location of the

cursor.

8Repeat steps 5 to 7 to insert items.

To cancel the selection, see “Cancelling selection of a part”

( page 98).

9When all items have been inserted, press .

The recorder displays a message, and starts saving the

Playlist.

When complete, the “CONTENT MENU” returns.

Notes

•You can access the “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing” also by selecting “Playlist Editing” on the “EDIT MENU”.

•If you delete titles and chapters (Original), the corresponding titles and chapters (Playlist) are also deleted. Contrarily, if you

delete titles and chapters (Playlist), the corresponding titles and chapters (Original) are not deleted.

•Playback may pause if a gap between the content is played.

•There may be a small difference between the chapter boundary and the actual playback picture.

•A title or chapter which is being edited cannot be selected as an item.

•You cannot add a title of still pictures, or a title or a chapter which contains both still and moving pictures, to a playlist.

•By copying (dubbing) a Playlist, a title (Original) of the same contents is created.

•You cannot program a Playlist of contents recorded on a DVD-R/RW disc. To make a Playlist using contents of DVD-RW

discs, copy them to the HDD beforehand.

•Down arrow on the thumbnails means: Orange: This title already selected. Green trimmed: Some chapters in this title already

selected. Green: This chapter already selected.

•A black thumbnail with “Recording” means that the title is being recorded or its recording will start within 15 seconds. This

thumbnail cannot start playback.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

ENTER

AAA

Playlist Editing

Source:Title

Object :Title

Original

PlayList

StartTitle: 2004/05/07 10:30 00:13:45

Entire Time:

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Playlist editing (Continued)

Editing

Cancelling selection of a part

1) From the “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing”, press

/ / / to select a part to cancel.

2) Press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

3) Press / to select “Cancel selected title”,

then press ENTER.

The part you have selected is cancelled.

Confirming the first and last scenes of a part or

a Playlist

You can play the first and last 3 seconds of a scene

(Preview). (If a title contains several chapters, the first

and last scenes of the chapters are also played.)

Preview of a part:

1) At step 5 on page 96, select a title or a

chapter, then press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Preview”, then press

ENTER.

Preview of all parts:

1) Move the cursor to an any part (in the lower

area), then press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Preview all playlists”,

then press ENTER.

Confirming the title information

1) At step 5 on page 96, select a title or a

chapter, then press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Title information” then

press ENTER.

Correcting a Playlist

You can add or delete parts to correct a Playlist.

1) From the CONTENT MENU, select a Playlist to

correct.

2) Press QUICK MENU.

3) Press / to select “Playlist re-editing” and

then press ENTER.

The “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing” appears.

Follow the procedure from steps 5 on page 96,

add or delete parts as necessary.

Note

•You cannot edit a title (Playlist) of still pictures, or a title

(Playlist) which contains both still and moving pictures.

Using a part in a Playlist also in another Playlist

1) In play or stop mode of a Playlist title, press

EDIT MENU.

The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.

2) Press / / / to select “Playlist editing,”

then press ENTER.

The “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing” appears.

3) Press / / / to select “Start” then press

ENTER.

The areas of title name and part selection become

blank.

4) Following the procedures outlined on page

96, make a Playlist.

Naming a title (Playlist)

1) From the “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing”, move a

cursor to the lower side (selected parts) then

press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Edit title name,” then

press ENTER.

A keyboard appears.

3) Following the procedures outlined on page

30, enter a title name.

Note

•You can name a title also while viewing its information.

From the “CONTENT MENU Title List”, select a title and

press the QUICK MENU button then select “Title

information” by the / buttons and the ENTER button.

Further press the QUICK MENU button, and select “Edit

title name” by the / buttons and the ENTER button.

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Making a Playlist of recorded contents where

starting times are the same (i.e. daily or weekly

recordings)

This will help to sort serials.

1) From the “CONTENT MENU Title List”, press

QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Edit function”, then press

ENTER.

3) Press / to select the item.

“Playlist(Mon-Fri)”

To sort out programs recorded on the same time on

Monday to Friday to make a Playlist.

“Playlist(every week)”

To sort out programs recorded on the same time of

the same day of the week to make a Playlist.

4) Press ENTER.

Notes

•Only titles (Original) can be sorted.

•The maximum number of sorted titles is 99.

•If you modify the recording start time or date of one of the

recorded serials, the title will not be sorted out. Contrarily,

any program can be sorted if its channel, recording start

time and date are modified as the same as others.

•“Playlist(Mon-Fri)” can sort titles even if they are not

complete 5 collections of Monday to Friday, on condition

that they have the same channel and recording start time,

and any recording date except Saturday and Sunday.

100

Editing

Creating thumbnails

(Changing the picture on the “CONTENT MENU”)

You can register your favorite scene as a thumbnail displayed on the “CONTENT MENU”.

On a finalized DVD-R/RW disc, this feature is not available.

1During stop or playback, press CONTENT

MENU.

The “CONTENT MENU Title List” appears.

Pressing the HDD or DVD button can switch the drives.

2Press / / / to select a title whose

thumbnail you want to change.

•To go to the next or previous page, press the

PICTURE SEARCH ( / ) button.

•To select a chapter, select a title and press the

button. The “Chapter List” appears.

By pressing the button again, you can return to the

Title List.

3Press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

CONTENT MENU

ENTER

QUICK MENU

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Original

HDD :

Title List Page

CONTENT

1/ 2

(0:53:45) Original

(0:29:50)

Original

(0:54:30)

Original

(0:51:28)

Original

(0:52:40)

Original

(0:30:08)

HDD

2004/06/08 7:00

Ch:42004/06/08 23:00

Ch:6

2004/07/11 7:00

Ch:8

2004/07/12 21:00

Ch:10

2004/06/12 19:00

Ch:3

2004/07/12 23:00

Ch:4

e.g.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

PICTURE SEARCH

HDD/DVD

HDD

Original

Title List Page

CONTENT

1/ 2

(0:53:45)

Original

(0:54:30)

Original

(0:51:28)

Original

(0:52:40)

Original

(0:30:08)

HDD :

Original

(0:29:50)

2004/06/08 7:00

Ch:42004/06/08 23:00

Ch:6

2004/07/11 7:00

Ch:8

2004/07/12 21:00

Ch:10

2004/06/12 19:00

Ch:3

2004/07/12 23:00

Ch:4

e.g.

Quick Menu

Title information

Create thumbnail

High speed dubbing

Rate conversion dubbing

Chapter function

Edit functon

Special playback mode

Save captured images

Disc information

Display changeover

Specific page jump

Title delete

Exit

101

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

4Press / to select “Create thumbnail”

(or “Create CHP thumbnail” if selected a

chapter at step 2), then press ENTER.

The “CONTENT MENU Create thumbnail” display

appears.

5Press PLAY to start playback.

Locate a scene you want to capture as a thumbnail.

You can use the following buttons.

PICTURE SEARCH, FRAME, SLOW, SKIP, PAUSE,

etc.

6At the point where you want to capture a

thumbnail image, press PAUSE.

7Press ENTER.

The “CONTENT MENU” returns. The selected scene is

displayed as a thumbnail.

Note

•There may be a small difference

between a thumbnail made on the

“Create thumbnail” display and that

displayed in the “CONTENT MENU”.

Operation with the PICTURE

SEARCH button may extend the

difference.

ENTER

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

SKIP

FRAME

SLOW

PICTURE SEARCH

PLAY

PAUSE

ENTER

00:54:30

2004/06/08 23:00 Ch:6

00:00:00

HDD

(0:29:50)

00:00:00:03F

Original

Location

Create thumbnail

Select desired thumbnail image via

remote. To set, press enter.

CONTENT

Title:002 Chapter:0001

e.g.

00:29:50

2004/06/08 23:00 Ch:6

00:00:00

HDD

(0:29:50)

00:06:25:23F

Original

Location

Create thumbnail

Select desired thumbnail image via

remote. To set, press enter.

CONTENT

Title:002 Chapter:0001

e.g.

Original

HDD :

Title List Page

CONTENT

1/ 2

(0:53:45)

Original

(0:54:30)

(

0:51:28

)

Original

(0:52:40)

(

0:30:08

)

HDD

Original

(0:29:50)

2004/06/08 7:00

Ch:42004/06/08 23:00

Ch:6

2004/07/11 7:00

Ch:8

2004/07/12 21:00

Ch:10

2004/06/12 19:00

Ch:3

2004/07/12 23:00

Ch:4

e.g.

102

Notes

•You cannot create thumbnails of chapters in a title that

contains a still picture.

•If you create a chapter thumbnail, and then shift the

chapter mark ( page 93) or record or edit the disc on

other devices, the chapter thumbnail may return to the top

of the chapter.

Creating thumbnails (Continued)

Editing

103

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Before dubbing

You can dub (copy or move) contents recorded in the HDD or DVD-RAM/R/RW, between HDD and DVD-RAM

drive or within the same drives.

The following contains information and notes about dubbing. Read carefully before dubbing.

Editing

Dubbing operations

This recorder has the following dubbing functions.

High speed dubbing

You can copy recorded contents without changing

the picture and sound quality.

“High speed” means the dubbing time is shorter

than the actual time of the content.

Use this function on the purposes such as the

followings:

–when you copy a whole title to a DVD-RAM/R/

RW disc.

–when you convert a Playlist into an Original title

(produce an Original title from a Playlist)

–when you copy contents recorded in DVD-VR

mode from a DVD-RW to the HDD.

High speed dubbing of several contents - “Dub

selected items”

You can select titles and chapters and copy them

all at once.

Rate conversion dubbing

You can copy a content, changing its data size to a

different data one with which the content was

recorded.

Use this function on the purposes such as the

followings:

–When you have recorded a content on the HDD

at a high rate (“MN (Manual)”), and you cannot

copy it to a DVD-RAM disc because the data size

is too large. (→ Reduce the data size.)

–When you recorded a content while “DVD

compatible mode” ( page 162) was set to

“Off”, and you cannot copy it to a DVD-R/RW in

the DVD-Video format; or when a DVD-RAM

disc was recorded with the other equipment

which is not compatible with this recorder’s

recording format, and you want to copy it to a

DVD-R/RW (→ Set “DVD compatible mode” to

“On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode II)”.)

Rate conversion dubbing of several parts

You can select titles and chapters and change the

data size and copy them all at once.

Use this function when you unify the compatibility

of several titles and contents all at once.

Line-U dubbing

You can record pictures recorded which is being

played.

Use this function when you want to copy contents

in DVD-R/RW recorded on other device, which

cannot show thumbnails in a “CONTENT MENU

Title List”, to the HDD.

All the above functions can copy data as original

digital signals. “Rate conversion dubbing” and “Line-

U dubbing”, however, needs data processing and

may deteriorate the original picture and sound

quality. Also, it is not possible to improve the picture

and sound quality by the Rate conversion dubbing at

increased bit rate.

•It is not possible to copy to a DVD-RW of DVD-VR mode.

•“High speed dubbing” between the HDD and a DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment is not possible.

•“High speed dubbing” to a finalized DVD-R/RW is not possible.

•“Line-U dubbing” using a DVD-R/RW which was recorded on other equipment and is not finalized yet is not possible.

Line-U

dubbing

Yes

Rate

conversion

dubbing of

several parts

Yes

Rate

conversion

dubbing

Yes

High speed

Library

dubbing of

several parts

Yes

High speed

Library

dubbing

Yes

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R/RW

(Not finalized yet)

HDD

DVD-RAM

HDD

DVD-R/RW

From

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R/RW

104

“Copy” and “Move”

This recorder’s “Dubbing” has the following two

definitions:

Copy:

The original programme remains after the operation

is completed.

Move:

The moved programme will be erased from the

original location after the operation is completed.

Whether or not you select either command depends

entirely on the given situation. The command may be

predetermined in some situations.

You cannot “move” contents in the following situations.

(Instead, you will want to “copy” them.)

•The content is protected ( page 50).

•A specified portion of the title (chapter) is copy-

protected, in which case, you cannot move from

DVD-RAM to the HDD.

•You cannot move a Playlist. ( page 87) Only

copying is permitted. When you copy a Playlist to a

disc, it will be treated an Original on the disc. The

original Playlist does not change to an Original.

Also, you cannot “move” or “copy” contents in the

following situations:

•The recorded content contains a programme that

permits a single copy only.

•The title (Playlist) contains a portion that prohibits

copying. Edit the title from the Original and create a

new Playlist.

Notes

•If either the HDD or DVD-RAM is not in optimum physical

condition, an error may occur when you execute “Move”

and some titles or chapters may be lost. If you want to

“Move” non-copy-protected titles and chapters, it is

recommended for safety that you first “Copy” them to the

opposite drive and confirm they have been copied properly.

Then delete the titles and chapters to which you have

executed “Move”.

•The recorder cannot copy/move the following discs:

DVD-VIDEO

VIDEO CD

Audio CD

CD-R

CD-RW

•If you cannot copy/move for some other reason, such as

insufficient disc capacity, etc., a message will appear on

screen. In such a case, follow the instructions in the

message.

•Depending on the content, associated information such as

data management may not be copied/moved.

•You cannot copy/move titles containing still pictures.

•Dubbing to DVD-R/RW may divide the original title

depending on the contents. Also, the DVD-Video format

recording ( page 122) may shift thumbnails.

•A part with aspect ratio 16:9 recorded at bit rate 1.4Mbps

cannot be dubbed to a DVD-R/RW. Change the aspect

ratio to 4:3.

•“High speed dubbing” ( page 106) and “Dub selected

items” ( page 108) procedures always comply with

“Aspect ratio(video mode)” setting ( page 162).

Before dubbing (Continued)

Editing

105

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Recording and playback during a dubbing

Dubbing process by “High speed dubbing” and “Dub selected items” procedures will allow you to make a recording

or playback of other titles.

Notes

•Timer programmed recording have priority over other operations. Dubbing may be stopped if a timer program recording

starts.

•While recording during dubbing, the “CONTENT MENU” and the “LIBRARY MENU” cannot appear.

•Playing a recorded title while recording another on the same disc ( page 36), is not possible while dubbing.

HDD DVD

HDD HDD

HDD

DVDDVD

DVD

HDD

DVD DVD

Playback

Available

Not available

Available

Recording

Available

Not available

Available

Playback

Not available

Available

Not available

Recording

Not available

Available

Not available

106

High speed Library dubbing (Dubbing only a specified part)

This section explains how to dub a spefific title or chapter. To select several parts and dub them all at

once, refer to page 108.

1During playback or stop, press CONTENT

MENU.

The “CONTENT MENU Title List” appears.

2Press / / / to select a part (a title or

chapter) to copy or move.

•You can go forward/back to pages by pressing the

PICTURE SEARCH ( / ) button.

You can jump to a page by specifying the page

number.

Press the QUICK MENU button, select “Specific page

jump”. Use the ADJUST button to change the page

number.

•To select a chapter, highlight a title and press the

button. If you press the button again, the title list re-

appears.

3Press QUICK MENU then select “High speed

dubbing” by pressing / from the Quick

Menu, then press ENTER.

The “CONTENT MENU High Speed Library Dubbing”

appears.

Editing

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

PICTURE SEARCH

ADJUST

CONTENT MENU

ENTER

QUICK MENU

ENTER

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

2004/06/10 21:00 Ch:4

High Speed Library Dubbing

CONTENT

(0:52:40)

Original

(Saves Original)

(Deletes Original)

Move

(Saves Original)

Same Disc

Copy

e.g.

Original

HDD :

Title List Page

CONTENT

1/ 2

(0:53:45) Original

(0:29:50)

Original

(0:54:30)

Original

(0:51:28)

Original

(0:52:40)

Original

(0:30:08)

HDD

2004/06/08 7:00

Ch:42004/06/08 23:00

Ch:6

2004/07/11 7:00

Ch:8

2004/07/12 21:00

Ch:10

2004/06/12 19:00

Ch:3

2004/07/12 23:00

Ch:4

e.g.

107

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

4Press / to select “Copy”, “Move” or “Same

Disc”.

Copy:

After the operation is completed, a specified part will

remain on the disc where it was previously located.

Move:

A part will move to the opposite disc and will be erased

from the disc where it was previously located.

Same Disc:

A part will be copied to the same disc and the copied

part will become another title.

This operation is useful to change a Playlist to Original.

“Copy” or “Move” is automatically selected in the

following cases.

Copy:

When a specified title (or chapter) is a Playlist.

When a specified title (or chapter) is locked ( page 50).

Move:

When a specified title (or chapter) is copy-protected.

5Press ENTER.

Copying starts.

The job progress is displayed on the screen and the

front panel display.

When the job finishes, the graph disappears and the

buzzer sounds.

You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when

the job finishes.

(1) During the operation, press the QUICK MENU button.

(2) Press the / buttons to select “Auto power off”.

(3) Press the ENTER button.

Notes

•A title or a chapter becomes a title by being copied.

•“Same Disc” job using a DVD-RAM disc will take a longer time.

•“Same Disc” is not available on DVD-R/RW.

•“Move” is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW.

•Some parts in DVD-R/RW may be divided if dubbed.

•For a copy-once permitted content, only moving from the HDD to a DVD-RAM disc is available. Executing this will delete the

original content in the HDD, and the one moved to a DVD-RAM will not be able to moved or copied.

•“High speed dubbing” is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment.

•If you record a title directly onto a DVD-R/RW in the DVD-Video mode on this recorder and execute “High speed dubbing” on

the title to the HDD, the recorder may display a message to initialize the HDD. In this case, delete the title or execute “All

HDD titles delete” ( page 163).

To cancel copying halfway through the

operation

1) During copying, press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

2) Press / to select “Cancel dubbing”, then

press ENTER.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

PROGRESSIVE

QUICK MENU

ENTER

Notes

•Cancellation of a copying operation will result in deletion of

a portion of the title or chapter already copied.

•Cancellation of a copying to a DVD-R cannot restore the

disc space in the DVD-R.

108

Editing

Dubbing selected items (Dubbing specified parts together)

This section explains how to copy several specific titles or chapters. Assigned names of titles/chapters

or other information can also be copied. A title or chapter becomes a title by being copied.

1During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.

The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.

2Press / to select “Dub Selected Items”.

3Press ENTER.

The “EDIT MENU Dub Selected Items” appears.

Thumbnails of the parts in the disc are displayed in the

upper area.

To change the dubbing destination:

1) Press the QUICK MENU button.

2) Press the / buttons to select “Change media to

HDD” or “Change Media to DVD”.

3) Press the ENTER button.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

HDD/DVD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Preparation

•Press the HDD or DVD button to select a disc that contains titles or chapters you want to copy.

EDIT MENU

ENTER

AAA

Dub Selected Items Title

Dubbing Media: DVD

Original

Start

Capacity

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Source will be Title.

109

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

4Press / / / to select a part (a title or

chapter) to copy.

•To go to the next or previous page, press the

PICTURE SEARCH ( / ) button.

•To select a chapter, first select the title that contains

the chapter you want, then press the button.

To go back to the title display, press the button

again.

5Press ENTER.

A cursor appears in the lower area (destination media).

6Press / to select a location to place the

selected part, then press ENTER.

If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor

to the left and press the ENTER button.

The selected part is inserted into the location of the

cursor.

(Continued)

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

PICTURE SEARCH

Dub Selected Items Title

Dubbing Media: DVD

Original

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Source will be Title.

ENTER

Dub Selected Items Title

Dubbing Media: DVD

Original

Start

Capacity

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Source will be Title.

Cursor

ENTER

AAA

Dub Selected Items Title

Dubbing Media: DVD

Original

Start

Capacity

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Source will be Title.

110

7Repeat steps 4 to 6.

You can confirm the available space of the destination media via

the bar at the bottom of the display.

Each of the collected parts is recorded on the destination media

as a title.

•To cancel selection of an individual part, see page 111.

8Press / to select “Start”, press ENTER, and

select “Yes”, then press ENTER.

The broadcast picture appears and dubbing starts.

The progress for each title is displayed on the screen

and in the front panel display on the recorder. The

buzzer sounds when the operation is completed.

You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when

the job is completed.

1) During the job, press the QUICK MENU button.

2) Press the / buttons to select “Auto power off”.

3) Press the ENTER button.

Notes

• This procedure of “Dub Selected Items” of specified parts does not move them. If you do not want to leave the items on the

original disc, delete them in the procedure for “Deleting selected items” ( page 118).

•To confirm the contents of an item, first select the item by using the / / / buttons and press the QUICK MENU button

to display the Quick Menu. Press the / buttons to select “Preview” (or ”Title information”) then press the ENTER button.

•Each part, when selected, shows its name at the bottom of the menu for about 2 seconds.

•“High speed dubbing” is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment.

•Dubbing procedures to DVD-R/RW always comply with “Aspect ratio(Video mode)” setting ( page 162).

•Some parts in DVD-R/RW may be divided if dubbed.

•If you record a title directly onto a DVD-R/RW in the DVD-Video mode on this recorder and execute “High speed dubbing” on

the title to the HDD, the recorder may display a message to initialize the HDD. In this case, delete the title or execute “All

HDD titles delete” ( page 163).

Dubbing selected items (Dubbing specified parts together) (Continued)

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

PROGRESSIVE

QUICK MENU

ENTER

Editing

111

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Cancelling selection of an item

1) Press / / / to select an item then press

QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

2) Press / to select “Cancel selected title” (or

“All clear” for cancelling selection of multiple

items at a time).

3) Press ENTER.

Changing the position of an item

Follow the procedure above to cancel selection of the

item, then repeat steps 4 to 6 on page 109 to

insert the item into its desired location.

Cancelling during dubbing

Press QUICK MENU to display the Quick Menu.

Press / to select “Cancel dubbing”, then press

ENTER.

Note

•This procedure copies items according to their order

indicated in the lower area. Therefore, there may be a case

that some items have already been copied at the time you

cancel dubbing.

AAA

Dub Selected Items Title

Dubbing Media: DVD

Original

Start

Capacity

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Quick Menu

Cancel selected title

Preview

Preview all selected items

Title information

Clear all selected items

Auto power off

Exit

112

Editing

Rate conversion dubbing (Dubbing at a modified bit rate)

You can reduce the recorded picture or sound rate when copying. This procedure enables content originally

recorded onto the HDD at high rate setting to be dubbed onto a DVD-RAM disc at a reduced bit rate.

Use the Rate conversion dubbing when

•you recorded a lengthy content on the HDD using the manual high rate, and it is too large to dub in the DVD-RAM disc.

•you recorded a title with setting the “DVD compatible mode” ( page 162) to “Off”, and you want to make a

DVD-R/RW disc for that title, or you used another recorder to record a title in a DVD-RAM disc, and you want to

create a DVD-R/RW disc for that title (Set “DVD compatible mode” to “On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode)” then execute this

procedure).

The Rate conversion dubbing can be performed in two different ways: part by part or multiple parts in one time. (To

dub multiple parts in one time, the same rate is applied to all parts. You cannot set different rate to each part.)

Preparation

• Press the HDD or DVD button to select a disc containing the parts that you want to dub.

1Perform steps 1 and 2 on page 106.

2Press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

3Press / to select “Rate conversion

dubbing”, then press ENTER.

The “CONTENT MENU Rate conversion dubbing”

appears.

Rate conversion dubbing for part by part

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

QUICK MENU

ENTER

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

2004/06/11 20:00 Ch:4

Rate conversion dubbing

CONTENT

(0:52:40)

Original

(Saves Original)

Same Disc

Copy

e.g.

Select Quick Menu to modify bitrate.

Higher bitrate for copied media will not improve quality.

All chapter marks will be deleted.

2.0

D/M2

2.0

D/M2

Original Copy

Result

113

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

4Press / to select “Copy” or “Same Disc”.

Copy:

After the operation is completed, a specified part will

remain on the disc where it was previously located.

Same Disc:

A part will be copied to the same disc and the copied

part will become another title.

5Confirm picture and sound rates.

To make changes, follow the procedure below.

1) Press the QUICK MENU button to display the Quick

Menu.

2) Press the / buttons to select an item then press

the ENTER button.

AV record quality:

The current settings you have made ( page 161) are

listed. Press the ADJUST ( / ) button to select a

desired setting.

Auto rate selection:

The recorder automatically selects the highest possible

rate, calculating from current unoccupied volume on the

disc. (This operation does not insure full recording of any

length program or whole use of unoccupied volume.)

6Press ENTER.

Copying starts.

To confirm the job progress, press the TIME BAR button

to display the time bar. (The time bar cannot be copied.)

When copying is completed, the buzzer sounds and the

current broadcast picture appears.

Pictures and sounds displayed during copying are for

monitoring purposes only. Recorded picture quality may

vary.

ENTER

QUICK MENU

ENTER

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

QUICK MENU

TIME BAR

2004/06/11 08:00pm TV:12

Rate conversion dubbing

CONTENT

(0:52:40)

Original

(Saves Original)

(

Saves Ori

inal

)

Same Disc

Copy

e.g.

Quick Menu

AV record quality

Auto rate selection

Auto power off

Exit

114

1During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.

The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.

2Press / to select “Rate Conv. Items”, then

press ENTER.

The “EDIT MENU Rate Conv. Items” appears.

3Collect parts to be dubbed, using steps 4 to 6

on page 109.

Each of the collected parts is recorded on the destination media

as a title.

You can cancel selection of an individual part.

1) Press the / / / buttons to select an item then press the

QUICK MENU button.

The Quick Menu appears.

2) Press the / buttons to select “Cancel selected title” (or “All

clear” for cancelling selection of multiple items at a time).

3) Press the ENTER button.

4Check the rate for picture and sound quality.

To change the setting, perform the following steps.

1) Press the QUICK MENU button to display the Quick Menu.

2) Press the / buttons to select “AV record quality” and press

the ENTER button.

3) Press the ADJUST ( / ) button to select the setting

number and press the ENTER button.

When “Copy” on the bottom shows “X”, the selected parts are

beyond the disc capacity. Change the rate for picture and sound

quality or reduce parts to dub.

Rate conversion dubbing for multiple parts

EDIT MENU

ENTER

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

TIME BAR

QUICK MENU

Rate conversion dubbing (Dubbing at a modified bit rate) (Continued)

Editing

Rate Conv. Items Title

Dubbing Media: DVD

Original

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Source will be Title.

115

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

5Press / to select “Start”, and select “Yes”,

then press ENTER.

Copying starts.

To confirm the job progress, press the TIME BAR button

to display the time bar. (The time bar cannot be copied.)

When copying is completed, the buzzer sounds and the

current broadcast picture appears.

Pictures and sounds displayed during copying are for

monitoring purposes only. Recorded picture quality may

vary.

Cancelling dubbing during rate conversion

dubbing

1) Press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Cancel dubbing”.

3) Press ENTER.

Note

•A portion of content from the start of recording to the

moment you cancel dubbing will be copied.

Turning off the power automatically after

dubbing

1) During dubbing, press QUICK MENU.

2) Press / to select “Auto power off”.

3) Press ENTER.

Notes

•Unlike High speed dubbing, Rate conversion dubbing may

cause slight deterioration in picture and sound quality of

recorded content. The time required for dubbing is about

the same as the playback time of the content.

•Quality will not be improved even if you select a rate higher

than original content.

•Chapter marks are not copied.

•Rate conversion dubbing to the same DVD-RAM/R/RW

disc is not possible.

•The recorder automatically inserts a black picture for a

moment before and after the new title produced by this

recording process.

•You cannot use the Rate conversion dubbing for copying

from a DVD-RAM disc to another DVD-RAM disc.

•During Rate conversion dubbing, the relay recording

function ( page 48) is disabled even if “Relay recording”

( page 162) is set to “On”.

•During Rate conversion dubbing, switching the audio

channel is not possible.

•Audio processed under the Rate conversion dubbing is

recorded in stereo.

•When you record a NICAM programme and play it back,

the left and right channels are output at the same time.

Select the sound by pressing the AUDIO button.

•When you set “DVD compatible mode” to “On (Mode I)” or

“On (Mode II)” ( page 162), only a selected sound (the

left and right channels) of the NICAM programme is

recorded. (Stereo broadcasting is recorded as stereo).

•If you perform the Rate conversion dubbing for a Playlist,

containing a chapter that is the beginning of the Original

title at recording, one frame at the beginning will be

removed.

•During Rate conversion dubbing, P in P function (

page 69), zoom function ( page 72), “Custom picture

select” ( page 157) and “Play DNR” ( page 158)

are disabled.

•Rate conversion dubbing to DVD-R/RW selects aspect

ratio according to the first title of dubbed items.

•Each part, when selected, shows its name at the bottom

of the menu for about 2 seconds.

ENTER

116

Line-U dubbing (Recording pictures while viewing them)

You can record the picture being played back in either disc, or to the other disc, if the content is not

copy-protected. This procedure can be used also to copy contents of a DVD-R/RW you created ( page

122), back to the HDD.

Dubbing

Preparation

•Make sure that the destination disc has adequate available remaining space.

•When you want to copy to the HDD, load a disc you want to play.

Example: To copy from a DVD-RAM disc to the HDD

1Press INPUT SELECT or CHANNEL repeatedly

to select “LineU.”

A black screen appears.

2Press HDD.

3Press REC.

Recording starts.

4Press DVD.

5Start playing.

Line U

Stereo

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

INPUT SELECT

CHANNEL

HDD

REC

DVD

PLAY

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

117

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

6When playback of content you want to copy is

finished, press STOP.

Playing stops, and a black screen returns.

7Press HDD.

8Press STOP.

Recording stops.

Notes

•The following combinations of a source and a destination disc are possible.

HDD to HDD, HDD to DVD-RAM, HDD to DVD-R/RW, DVD-RAM to HDD, DVD-R/RW to HDD

•A title dubbed by this procedure has black pictures at both the beginning and the end of the title. Therefore thumbnails in the

“CONTENT MENU” may be black. If you change the thumbnail, see page 100.

•You can record still pictures and slow pictures during playback.

•Contents of DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD, and audio CD cannot be recorded with Line-U dubbing.

•Line-U dubbing may cause slight deterioration in picture and sound quality of contents.

•Screen menus such as “CONTENT MENU” or “REC MENU” cannot be recorded with Line-U dubbing.

•“Line-U dubbing” cannot be set as programme recording.

•When doing this procedure, programme recording must not be initiated. If you display the “REC MENU”, playback is

automatically cancelled.

•When setting the input to “Line-U”, audio output is set to stereo automatically. You cannot switch the audio channel. During

Line-U dubbing, you can change the audio output.

•Accompanying audio content to be recorded with Line-U dubbing is always in stereo.

•During Line-U dubbing, the virtual surround function ( page 158) is disabled.

•Even if “Relay recording” is set to “On” ( page 162), the relay recording function is disabled during Line-U dubbing.

•For Line-U dubbing, a scene permitting copy-once cannot be copied.

•During Line-U dubbing, P in P function ( page 69), zoom function ( page 72), “Custom picture select” ( page 157)

and “Play DNR” ( page 158) are disabled.

HDD

STOP

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

STOP

118

Deleting selected items (Deleting multiple specified parts)

This section explains how to simultaneously delete unnecessary titles and chapters.

On a finalized DVD-R/RW disc, this feature is not possible.

1During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.

The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.

2Press / to select “Del Selected Items”.

3Press ENTER.

The “EDIT MENU Del Selected Items” appears.

Thumbnails of the parts in the disc are displayed in the

upper area.

Editing

EDIT MENU

ENTER

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Preparation

•Press the HDD or DVD button to select a disc that contains titles or chapters you want to delete.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

HDD/DVD

AAA

Del Selected Items Title

Object

Original

Start

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Main Menu Source

Edit Functions

Dub Selected Items

Rate Conv. Items

Combine ORG Title

DVD-Video Creation

Del Selected Items

DVD-Video Finalizing

Playlist Editing

Chapter Editing

DV Recording

HDD

e.g. EDIT

Del Selected Items

Several titles or unnecessary chapters

in several titles can bedeleted at one

time.

321

1 2

Title Title Title

119

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Notes

•To confirm the first and last scenes of an item, first select an item then press the QUICK MENU button. Press the /

buttons to select “Preview” (or “Title information”) then press the ENTER button. This is available only on contents recorded

in the HDD or DVD-RAM discs.

•Titles and chapters show their names for about 2 seconds at the bottom of the screen when they are selected.

•On a DVD-RW disc, deleting can restore the disc space only by deleting the last recorded title.

•Deleting cannot be cancelled once started. Be careful when executing the deletion process.

•If you select a title for the part to be removed, you cannot select chapters in that title.

•Chapters in DVD-R/RW discs cannot be selected to delete.

4Following steps 4 to 6 on page 109,

assemble the items to delete.

5Press repeatedly to select “Start”, then

press ENTER.

The recorder begins the deletion process.

To cancel deleting, press the / buttons to select

“No”, then press the ENTER button.

When the process is finished, the “EDIT MENU Main

Menu” returns.

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

CONTENT MENU

QUICK MENU

ENTER

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

PROGRESSIVE

QUICK MENU

ENTERENTER

120

Combine Original titles (Combine two titles into one)

Use this feature to combine two titles into one. The second title is deleted as the second title is added to

the end of the first title.

1During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.

The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.

2Press / to select “Combine ORG Title”,

then press ENTER.

The “EDIT MENU Combine ORG Title” display appears.

3Press / to select the first title to merge.

Press the PICTURE SEARCH button to move to the

previous or next page.

4Press ENTER.

The cursor appears in the lower area of the screen (the

title to merge to).

Cursor

Editing

EDIT MENU

ENTER

Preparation

•Press the HDD or DVD button to select a disc that contains titles or chapters you want to merge.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

HDD/DVD

PICTURE SEARCH

HDD

DVD-RAM

AAA

Combine ORG Title Title

Object :HDD

Original

Start combining

Title:

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

For source, only 2 titles (original)

can e selected. After combined,

the second title is included into the

first one.

AAA

Object :HDD

Start combining

Title:

For source, only 2 titles (original)

can e selected. After combined,

the second title is included into the

first one.

121

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

5Press / to select the location to put the

part and press ENTER.

It is fixed at the left side at the beginning. Press the

ENTER button. The selected part moved into the

location of the cursor.

6Perform steps 3 to 5 and select the second

title.

You cannot select the same title.

To cancel the registered part:

1) Select the part that you want to cancel, and press the QUICK

MENU button to display the Quick Menu.

2) Press the / buttons to select “Cancel selected title” (or

“Clear all selected items” for cancelling the selection of

multiple items at a time).

3) Press the ENTER button.

7Press / to select “Start combining”and

press ENTER, then select “Yes” and press

ENTER.

The combining process starts.

Notes

•You cannot stop the combining process after it has started.

•You cannot combine titles if their length will exceed 8 hours.

•You cannot combine a protected title or a title containing still pictures.

•The title name of the first title is given to the title after combining.

•The second title is combined into the first title, maintaining the chapter divisions and chapter names.

•Titles and chapters show their names for about 2 seconds at the bottom of the screen when they are selected.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

QUICK MENU

ENTER

Combine ORG Title

Title

Object :HDD

Original

Start combining

Title:

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

For source, only 2 titles (original)

can e selected. After combined,

the second title is included into the

first one.

122

Editing

Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW

Content stored on the HDD of the recorder can be edited and copied to a DVD-R, a popular media for

distribution, and played on a compatible DVD video player. Rewriteable DVD-RW are also available.

Caution

•Beforehand confirm the content in the disc.

If you use a DVD-R, prepare a new one. This DVD-Video creation procedure is possible only once per disc on

this recorder. Once you have copied to a DVD-R, you cannot redo it, add, delete, or correct the copied contents

in the disc. If you start copying then cancel the job, you cannot re-use the DVD-R.

If you use a DVD-RW, be sure to confirm contents in it. This procedure overwrites a whole disc, and all contents

in a DVD-RW will be lost. If you want to add contents to a DVD-RW, do not use this procedure. Record directly

or make a dubbing to the DVD-RW, then execute the finalization ( page 132). This procedure includes the

finalizing process, and you will not be able to add, delete, or correct contents to a DVD-RW later, as it will have

been finalized. If a finalized DVD-RW has remaining space, you can add contents there if you cancel the

finalizing process of the DVD-RW ( page 135).

•Do not start copying to a DVD-R/RW when a programmed recording is scheduled to begin shortly.

Copying entirely to a DVD-R/RW will take 1 hour and a half (variable depending on the contents). (This does not

include time for “Writing Test”. This option requires more time. Actual time for “Writing Test” depends on the

contents to test, and may be longer than the playing time of the contents if the disc contains too little contents or

too many quality and picture settings, etc.)

If a start time of a programmed recording comes during this procedure, the recording is made onto the HDD.

However, while making a menu theme, the recording is not executed. Also, programmed recordings to DVD

media with “Off” setting of “Relay recording” ( page 162) are not executed.

If a programmed recording starts during this procedure, you cannot continue to make one more discs after

completion of the first disc.

•Ensure the compatibility of a disc.

Refer to the page 9.

* Discs made by this procedure will comply with the DVD-Video standard. However, it is not guaranteed to play

properly on all DVD video players (including TOSHIBA products).

Depending on the disc, there may be a difference of data capacity between DVD-R and DVD-RW. It may be

possible that contents you have just recorded onto a DVD-R cannot be recorded onto a DVD-RW. (DVD-RW

capacity may be smaller.)

•Follow the instructions on handling of the disc.

Preparation

•Record contents which you want to copy to DVD-R/RW to make DVD-Video, to the HDD with the following settings:

- “DVD compatible mode” ( page 162): “On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode II)”.

- Bit rate of 4.0 or more.

•Load a new DVD-R or a DVD-RW. (Follow the instructions on handling of the disc.)

•Press the HDD button to select the HDD mode.

Notes

•If you recorded a title while setting “DVD compatible mode” ( page 162) to “Off” or you used another recorder to record a

title in a DVD-RAM disc, and you want to copy such a title to a DVD-R/RW to create a DVD-Video, first set “DVD compatible

mode” to “On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode II)” then execute the procedure of “Rate conversion dubbing ( page 112).

•Depending on the disc, DVD-R 4X speed compatibility may be disabled.

DVD-RW

DVD-R

123

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

1Press EDIT MENU.

The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.

2Press / to select “DVD-Video Creation”,

then press ENTER.

The “EDIT MENU DVD-Video Create (Selected Items)”

appears.

Thumbnails of titles on the HDD are displayed in the

upper area.

3Press / / / to select a part (a title or

chapter) to copy to the DVD-R/RW.

•To go to the preceding or following page, press the

PICTURE SEARCH button.

•To select a chapter, first select the title that contains

the chapter you want, then press the button.

To return to the title display, press the button again.

EDIT MENU

ENTER

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

PICTURE SEARCH

ENTER

AAA

DVD-Video Create

(Selected Items)

Sourece: Title

Original

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Creating Media: DVD

Capacity

AAA

DVD-Video Create

(Selected Items)

Sourece: Title

Original

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Creating Media: DVD

Capacity

5432

Main Menu

Chapter Editing

Chapters can be divided on frame

basis. Chapters can be merged and

assigned names.

Title

Merge

Divide

Source

Edit Functions

Dub Selected Items

Rate Conv. Items

Combine ORG Title

DVD-Video Creation

Del Selected Items

DVD-Video Finalizing

Playlist Editing

Chapter Editing

DV Recording

HDD

e.g. EDIT

124

Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Confined)

Editing

4Press ENTER.

A cursor appears in the lower area (destination media).

5Press / to select a location to place the

selected part, then press ENTER.

If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor

to the left and press the ENTER button.

The selected part is inserted into the location of the

cursor.

6Repeat steps 3 to 5.

You can confirm the available volume of a DVD-R/RW on the bar

at the bottom of the menu.

Each of the assembled parts is recorded onto the destination

media as a title.

•To cancel selection of a part, see page 130.

•To change the title/chapter name or thumbnail before selection:

1) Select the part that you want to change, and press the QUICK

MENU button.

2) Press the / buttons to select “Edit title name” or “Modify

title thumbnail” to change the title, or “Edit chapter name” or

“Modify chapter thumbnail” to change the chapter, and press

the ENTER button.

3) Use the entry screen to change the title or chapter name.

To change a title thumbnail or a chapter thumbnail, see the

steps on page 100.

Cursor

ENTER

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

PICTURE SEARCH

QUICK MENU

AAA

DVD-Video Create

(Selected Items)

Sourece: Title

Original

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Creating Media: DVD

Capacity

ENTER

AAA

DVD-Video Create

(Selected Items)

Sourece: Title

Original

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Creating Media: DVD

Capacity

125

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

7Press / to select “Next”, then press

ENTER.

A screen is displayed to select options.

8Press / / / to set the items.

For the instruction of setting, see the description shown

at selection.

•When you have selected “Parts Test” or “All Test” for

“Writing Test”, extra time is required for pre-writing

test. “All Test” requires more time than “Parts Test”.

If a DVD-RW is used, the recorder regards “All Test”

selection as “Parts Test” to execute the test.

If you select “None” for “Menu Create”:

The setting of “Start Play” and “After play one title” is

skipped automatically.

9Press / to select “Next”, then press

ENTER.

A screen is displayed to confirm the information you are

going to write.

Press the button to select “Edit Name” and press the

ENTER button to go to the character entry screen. The

number of characters is limited for the disc name you can

enter.

If you selected “None” for “Menu Create” at step 8,

select “Writing” on the bottom right corner, and press the

ENTER button. Skip to step 14.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

ENTERENTER

AAA

DVD Video Creation(Option Settings)

EDIT

e.g.

NextReturn

Menu Create Title+Chapter Title Chapter None

Writing Test None Parts Test All Test

Set aspect ratio Original 4:3 fixed 16:9 fixed

Start Play

Title 1

After play one title

After play final title

Next Title

Title 1

Stop

ENTER

AAA

DVD Video Creation(Disc Information)

EDIT

e.g.

NextReturn

Disc Name

1 hour 24 min.

Edit Name

Total title number

Total time

126

Press to select “Next”, then press ENTER.

A display of title menu selection appears if “Menu

Create” is set to “Tltle+Chapter” or “Title” at step 7.

To view your captured images ( page 129), go to the

next page.

If you press the button, you can preview the selected

menu. To return, press the O button.

While displaying a preview screen of your captured

image, you can access the other menu to correct colour

( page 129) by pressing the button.

Press / / / to select the menu, then

press ENTER.

If you have set “Menu Create” to “Title+Chapter” or

“Chapter” at step 7, a screen is displayed to select a

chapter menu.

Press / / / to select the chapter menu.

The selected menu is set for all chapters.

You cannot set it for each chapter individually.

If you press the button, you can preview the selected

menu. To return, press the O button.

If you press the button to select “Return” while

previewing and press the ENTER button, you will return

to the preview of the title menu. To go back to the

chapter menu, press the / / / button to select a

number next to “Chapter Menu” on the bottom center.

Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Confined)

Editing

ENTERENTER

AAA

DVD Video Creation (Title Menu Select)

EDIT

e.g.

DO NOT

MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

Deep Blue Olive Sepia Light Blue

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

Orange Cyber Green Lavender Cyber Red

MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS

MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS

1/ 2

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

ENTER

127

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Press ENTER on the “EDIT MENU DVD Video

Creation (Chapter Menu Select)” display.

A confirmation message is displayed.

Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.

The current broadcast picture appears and dubbing

starts. The progress is displayed on the screen and in

the front panel display on the recorder.

When copying is completed, a finalizing process follows.

This enables the disc to be played on a DVD video

player.

When the process is completed, a message “Create

another DVD-Video now?” appears (except when “Auto

power off” (see below) is set). If you select “Yes”, you

can make one more DVD-R/RW of the same content. If

you select “No”, you can complete creating the DVD-

Video.

•You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when

the job finishes.

1) During the job, press the QUICK MENU button.

2) Press the / buttons to select “Auto power off”.

3) Press the ENTER button.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

QUICK MENU

ENTER

128

Notes

•The number of titles that you can write on a DVD-R/RW is

limited (99 titles. Each title should have 99 chapters or

less). If you have a large number of titles or chapters, you

may not be able to write due to the limitation of the DVD

specifications. Also, even if the number of titles and

chapters is within the limit, you may not be able to write if

you have a large number of menu items.

•Due to standard differences, the number of chapters and

their position may change slightly after DVD-Video

creation. (For chapters generated on the DVD-R/RW, the

same thumbnail for the Original chapter is displayed.)

•Due to standard limitation, DVD-R/RW may contain

unnecessary scenes after creation.

•If you select items of various types of video outputs, aspect

ratios or other properties, or if you select an item recorded

with different settings, they may be divided into titles. (For

titles generated on the DVD-R/RW, the same thumbnail for

the Original title is displayed).

•Content based on a complicated Playlist or composed of

too many items may not be copied properly.

•Copy-once permitted contents cannot be copied to a

DVD-R/RW, even if they are recorded onto the HDD while

“DVD compatible mode” is set to “On (Mode I)” or “On

(Mode II)” ( page 162).

•Content recorded on a recorder other than this recorder

(including TOSHIBA products) cannot be copied to a DVD-

R/RW using High speed dubbing. First set “DVD

compatible mode” to “On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode II)” and

record them onto the HDD. Then perform “Rate conversion

dubbing” ( page 112) to copy to the HDD.

•When a content is recorded with manual rate 1.4 Mbps and

is including a 16:9 picture shape scene, the DVD creation

of the content may failure. In this case, set “Set aspect

ratio” to “4:3 fixed” on the menu “(Option Settings)”.

•Even if the title is recorded with “DVD compatible mode” set

to “On (Mode I)” or “On (Mode II)”, using a recorder other

than this may cause failure when recording to a DVD-R/RW.

•If the DVD-R creating fails to be completed, most of the

discs cannot be used again.

•If an error occurs while a DVD-Video is created, the error

code “ERR-**” (** indicates the error code) is shown in

the front panel display of the recorder. ( page 169) To

clear this display, press the DISPLAY button.

•There may be a difference between a specified thumbnail

of menu in the DVD-Video creation procedure and the one

on displayed in the “CONTENT MENU”.

Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Confined)

Editing

Selecting the items displayed on the menu

You can hide items on the menu if necessary.

To hide a disc name

Leave “Disc Name” blank. Display the on-screen

keyboard and press the CLEAR button to delete

letters, then press the button to save.

To hide a page number

Leave “Disc Name” blank. Follow the above

method.

To hide a disc name and show a page number

Enter one more space in “Disc Name”.

To hide a title/chapter name

On the “CONTENT MENU” or a display of item

selection, select a title/chapter and display the

on-screen keyboard from the Quick Menu. Erase all

characters of the name.

You can hide a time also using the same manner.

•“Chapter 0001” . . . on the “CONTENT MENU”

means that the chapter is given no characters as

its name. Such a chapter does not show the

name on the menu.

•A chapter menu shows the title name at the top

right corner. If you hide the title name, no

character appears in this area.

To hide a title/chapter name and show a time

Enter one more space and save it as the title/

chapter name.

Note

•You cannot hide items other than above.

129

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Using a favorite scene as a menu

You can select favorite scenes from the recorded

contents and use them as menus of DVD-Video

Created ( page 126) DVD-R/RW.

1) During stop or playback, press CONTENT

MENU.

2) Press / / / to select a title which

contains a scene to use as menus.

3) Press QUICK MENU.

4) Press / to select “Save captured images”.

5) Select a scene.

Locate a scene using the buttons such as PLAY,

SLOW, FRAME or PAUSE, etc.

6) Press / to select “Loading” and press

ENTER.

Note

•You cannot capture copy-protected contents.

•The maximum number of pictures which can be saved

varies depending on the data size.

To name a captured image

Press / / / to select an image to name then

press QUICK MENU. Press / to select “Enter

DVD-Video menu name” then press ENTER.

The on-screen keyboard appears.

Enter a name.

00:54:3000:00:00

Save captures images

00:00:00:03F

4:3

Original

Aspect Ratio

Location

Select back ground picture

2003/06/10 17:09 Ch:3

Title: 002 Chapter: 0004

HDD

EDIT

T001(00:00:23)

e.g.

00:54:3000:00:00

Save captures images

00:00:00:03F

4:3

Original

Aspect Ratio

Location

Select back ground picture

2003/06/10 17:09 Ch:3

Title: 002 Chapter: 0004

HDD

EDIT

T001(00:00:23)

e.g.

Quick Menu

Enter DVD-Video menu name

Delete name

Delete all menus

Exit

To delete a captured image

Press / / / to select an image to delete then

press QUICK MENU. Press / to select “Delete

menu” then press ENTER. Follow the message to

operate.

To delete all captured images, select “Delete all

menus”.

Selecting colour options on menus

Several options are available: a translucent

background for better legibility, character colour and

cursor colour selections.

1) At step 10 ( page 126), go to the next page

and select a captured image by / / / ,

then press .

The preview screen appears.

2) Press .

A colour setting display appears.

3) Set each item by / / / , referring to the

guidance on the right half of the display, finally

press to exit.

The preview screen returns.

AAA

DVD-Video Creation (color setting)

EDIT

e.g.

Back ground color On Off

White Black

0.5 0.7 0.9

Color

Permeation Ratio

Character

color

Selecting

color

Selected

color

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

1110

987654321

121110

987654321

121110

987654321

Set up the disc name, the

title name or page numer

on upper side of the screen,

OR the letter color of the

title name, the chapter

name and the time beside

the thumbnail.

130

Cancelling selection of an item

1) Press / / / to select an item then press

QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

2) Press / to select “Cancel selected title” (or

“Clear all selected items” for cancelling

selection of all items at a time).

3) Press ENTER.

The selected item disappears.

Changing the location of an item

Follow the procedure above to cancel selection of the

item, then repeat steps 3 to 5 to re-insert the item in a

desired location ( page 123, 124).

Confirming the content in the lower area

Select an item and press QUICK MENU. Then press

/ to select “Preview” and press ENTER.

Notes

•Each time an item is selected, its name appears at the

bottom of the screen.

•You can also confirm the content by selecting “Title

information” from the Quick Menu.

Cancelling dubbing process

Press QUICK MENU to display the Quick Menu.

Press / to select “Stop creating DVD video”,

then press ENTER.

Notes

•To cancel creating a DVD-R will render the loaded DVD-R

useless.

•Cancelling is not always possible.

AAA

DVD-Video Create

(Selected Items)

Sourece: Title

Original

HDD

EDIT

e.g.

Creating Media: DVD

Capacity

Quick Menu

Cancel selected title

Preview

Preview all selected items

Title information

Clear all selected items

Auto power off

Exit

To improve legibility of characters on menus

Press / / / to set “Back ground color” to

“On”. Then select “Color” (“White” or “Black”)

according to the menu’s tone, and set “Permeation

Ratio”, which sets how translucent the selected

Back ground color is. The higher the ratio, the Back

ground color will be more translucent but the lower

legibility of characters.

To change the character colour

Press / / / to select from 12 colours. When

you select “White” back ground colour, dark colour

should be a better choice.

To change the cursor colour

“Selecting Color” is a colour for moving cursor.

“Selected Color” is one for press of the ENTER

button.

To preview your selections

Press the O button to return to the preview screen.

If you correct your selections, repeat steps 2) and

3) ( page 129).

Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Confined)

Editing

131

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

If a message appears while selecting a part

You may receive a message, such as “Selection of

Writing Test in the next option setting is recommended

to check whether Aspect Ratio coexists”. If a copy-

prohibited content is included, or if the aspect ratio is

changed meanwhile, cancel the selection. If you are

not sure, select “Writing Test” (“Parts Test” or “All Test”).

Note

•Depending on selection or condition of items, copying may

result in failure. If a message appears, be sure to, prior to

step 7, press the QUICK MENU button. Then press the

/ buttons to select “Cancel selected title”, and press

the ENTER button. If you do not do this and continue the

copying process, an error may occur and the disc will be

rendered useless.

Playing a created DVD-Video

You can play the DVD-R/RW in the same manner as you

would play a DVD video disc.

See page 60.

If you want to correct the contents of a DVD-RW

after the DVD-Video creation procedure

Cancel the finalization of the DVD-RW ( page 135).

It is possible only on DVD-RW recorded on this

recorder.

After cancelling, you can delete titles. However, you

cannot re-use the whole disc, since only the last title

can restore the disc space.

If you want to delete all contents of a DVD-RW

after the DVD-Video creation procedure

Load the DVD-RW into the recorder and initialize it,

then execute the procedure of DVD-Video creation

( page 122).

132

DVD-Video finalizing process

The recorder processes recorded data in a DVD-R/RW disc so that it can be played on other compatible

devices.

Important

•You cannot rewrite data onto a disc after you execute the DVD-Video finalizing process. However, the disabled rewritability of

a DVD-RW disc can be restored by cancelling the process of the disc ( page 135). On DVD-R discs, cancelling of the

DVD-Video finalizing process is not available.

•Cancelling of the DVD-Video finalizing process is available only on DVD-RW recorded or copied contents on this recorder.

Preparation

•Press the DVD button to select the DVD mode.

•Load a DVD-R/RW disc you want to execute the finalizing process.

1During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.

The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.

2Press / to select “DVD-Video Finalizing”.

3Press ENTER.

A display of option settings appears.

Editing

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

EDIT MENU

ENTER

DVD-RW

DVD-R

AAA

DVD-Video Finalize(Option Settings)

EDIT

e.g.

NextReturn

Menu Create Title+Chapter Title Chapter None

Writing Test None Parts Test All Test

Set aspect ratio Original 4:3 fixed 16:9 fixed

Start Play

Title 1

After play one title

After play final title

Next Title

Title 1

Stop

Main Menu Source

Edit Functions

Dub Selected Items

Rate Conv. Items

Combine ORG Title

DVD-Video Creation

Del Selected Items

DVD-Video Finalizing

Playlist Editing

Chapter Editing

DV Recording

e.g. EDIT

DVD-Video Finalizing

Used to crete compatibility between

the recorded DVD-R/-RW and

DVD Players. Also used for setting up

“menu picture”, etc.

Title

Finalize

Title Title

321 3

1 2

321 3

1 2

DVD-R

133

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

4Press / / / to select.

As you select each item, its function is explained.

When “Menu Create” is set to “None”:

“Start play” and “After play one title” are automatically

omitted.

5Press / to select “Next”, then press

ENTER.

Information on data to be processed appears.

If you press the button to select “Edit Name” then

press the ENTER button, a keyboard appears so that

you can enter a title name.

When “Menu Create” is set to “None”:

Select “Writing” at the right bottom by the / / /

buttons and press the ENTER button. Skip to step 10.

6Press to select “Next”, then press ENTER.

When “Menu Create” is set to “Title+Chapter” or “Title”,

a display of title menu selection appears.

To view your captured images ( page 129), go to the

next page.

If you press the button, you can preview the selected

menu. To return, press the O button.

While displaying a preview screen of your captured

image, you can access the other menu to correct colour

( page 129) by pressing the button.

(Continued)

ENTER

ENTERENTER

DVD-Video Finalize (Title Menu Select)

EDIT

e.g.

DO NOT

MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

DO NOT

LEAVE HERE

Deep Blue Olive Sepia Light Blue

DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT

MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS

MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALSMR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS

1/ 2

AAA

DVD-Video Finalize(Disc Information)

EDIT

e.g.

NextReturn

Disc Name

1 hour 24 min.

Edit Name

Total title number

Total time

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

134

Editing

DVD-Video finalize process (Continued)

7Press / / / to select the title menu, then

press ENTER.

A display of chapter menu selection appears if “Menu

Create” is set to “Title+Chapter” or “Chapter” at step 3.

8Press / / / to select the chapter menu.

A selected menu is applied to all chapters. You cannot

allocate a menu to each chapter.

If you press the button, you can preview the selected

menu. To return, press the O button.

If you press the button during preview, to select

“Return” then press the ENTER button, you can go to

the preview of the selected title menu. To return to the

preview of chapter menu, press the / / / buttons

to select a number next to “Chapter Menu” then press

the ENTER button.

9Press ENTER on the “EDIT MENU DVD-Video

Finalize (Chapter Menu Select)” display, and

select “Yes” by / , then press ENTER.

A message appears to ask you if you want the power to

turn off automatically or not when the process is

completed.

Press / to select “Yes” or “No”, then press

ENTER.

A message disappears and the finalize process starts.

The progress is displayed on the screen and in the front

panel display on the recorder.

ENTER

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

QUICK MENU

135

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

Notes

•DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder may not be

recognized on other devices unless you execute DVD-

Video finalizing process to them.

•You can record onto a DVD-R disc additionally to the limit

of the disc capacity, unless you execute the DVD-Video

finalizing process to it. Deleting of recorded titles is also

possible, however, the disc space cannot be restored.

•You can record additional content onto a DVD-RW disc

additionally to the limit of the disc capacity unless you

execute the DVD-Video finalizing process to it. Deleting of

recorded titles is also possible, however, the disc space

can be restored only by the volume of the title last

recorded.

•On DVD-RW discs, it is possible to cancel the DVD-Video

finalizing process or to initialize for a new use.

•If a start time of a programmed recording comes during

finalizing process, the recording is made onto the HDD.

However, while making a menu, the recording is not

executed. Also, when “Relay recording” is set to “Off” the

recording will not start.

To cancel the finalize process

DVD-RW

You can cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process

executed to a DVD-RW disc so that the disc can be

recordable again.

1) During stop, press QUICK MENU.

A quick menu appears.

2) Press / to select “Disc management” then

press ENTER.

3) Press / to select “Cancel finalization” then

press ENTER.

4) Read the message, and press / to select

“Yes”, then press ENTER.

The process starts.

Notes

•While the recorder is ready to start a programmed

recording, you cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing

process.

•You cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process

executed on a DVD-RW disc recorded on other device.

•You cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process

executed on a DVD-RW disc if the disc is protected.

•Cancelling the DVD-Video finalizing process may shift the

thumbnails of titles/chapters.

136

DV recording (Recording from a digital video camera)

You can connect a DV format digital video camera to the DV terminal to record from it.

Preparation

•Press the HDD or DVD button to select a recording media.

•Connect a DV format digital video camera to the DV terminal on the front panel.

1During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.

The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.

2Press / to select “DV Recording”.

3Press ENTER.

The “EDIT MENU DV Recording (Option Setting)”

appears.

This display will also appear when a DV format digital

video camera connected to the DV terminal is turned on

EDIT MENU

ENTER

Editing

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

AAA

DV Recording (Option Setting)

EDIT

e.g.

Change

DV Chapter Create Off By Date By Scene

DV Audio Input

AV Record Quality

Stereo1(L2+R2) Stereo2(L2+R2)

DVD-Video:CHP Create

Off

5min. 10min. 15min. 20min.

4.6

D/M1

DV terminal

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

HDD/DVD

Main Menu Source

Edit Functions

Dub Selected Items

Rate Conv. Items

Combine ORG Title

DVD-Video Creation

Del Selected Items

DVD-Video Finalizing

Playlist Editing

Chapter Editing

DV Recording

HDD

e.g. EDIT

DV Recording

When using DV terminal, it is used for

setting up Auto Chapter Creation and

AV Record Quality.

Recording

DV Original Picture

Saved Title

3 4 521

137

Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Recording Playback

4Press / / / to make the settings.

As you select each item, an explanation is provided.

To change the picture and sound rates:

1) Press the / buttons to select “Change” then press

the ENTER button.

2) On the “AV record quality” display, press the ADJUST

button to select a setting number.

3) Press the ENTER button.

5Press / / / to select “Next”, then press

ENTER.

Details on the recording appears.

6Play the connected DV format digital video

camera and pause the play at a desired scene.

7Press / / / to select “Rec”, then press

ENTER.

Recording starts.

To pause the recording, select “Pause” by the

/ / / buttons then press the ENTER button.

To stop the recording, select “Stop (Save)” by the

/ / / buttons then press the ENTER button.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

ADJUST

ENTER

AAA

DV Recording

ReturnEnd

Full Display

EDIT

e.g.

Recording Media : DVD

––:––:––:––F

––:––:––

Playback Time

––:––:––

Remaining space

AV Record Quality

DV Chapter Create

Rec

-------------------

“Play” and then “Pause” with the connected equipment to DV.

-------------------

Equipment with DV Terminal

Manufacturer

Equipement

Rec Stop(Save)

4.6

D/M1

Off

138

DV Recording (Recording from a digital video camera) (Continued)

Notes

•The DV terminal of this recorder supports only input from a

DV format digital video camera. It cannot output to a

connected device. Some models of DV format digital video

cameras may be not compatible.

•At step 5, you can enlarge the video image by selecting

“Full Display”, then pressing the ENTER button.

•If “DV Chapter Create” is set to “Off” and you record onto a

DVD-R/RW disc, chapters are automatically made

according to the “DVD-Video:CHP create” setting

( page 162). The number of chapters has the limit.

Chapters are divided with a margin of about 0.5 second or

less according to the DVD-Video standard.

•DV recording does not start in the following cases:

- While recording or in the time slip mode.

- While operating a “REC MENU”, “CONTENT MENU” or

“LIBRARY MENU”.

- If the recorder’s clock is not set yet.

- Within 5 minutes before a programmed recording starts, or

during a programmed recording.

•If a DV recording overlaps with a programmed recording,

the DV recording will stop 5 minutes before the

programmed recording starts, and the programmed

recording will be executed.

•DV recording does not work if the DV terminal is connected

equipment other than DV format digital video camera, such

as a PC.

•Depending on the connected DV format digital video

camera, the display at step 5 may not show “Manufacturer”

or “Equipment”.

•If the DV terminal is connected to more than one DV format

digital video camera, DV recording may not work properly.

For proper functioning of DV recording, connect only one

device to the DV terminal.

•DV recording is not compatible with Relay recording.

•Do not keep the DV terminal connected unless you record

from a DV format digital video camera, as it may give

influence on the recorder if operated.

•If you leave the “EDIT MENU DV Recording” unoperated

for about 15 minutes, it switches to the full mode if “Screen

protector” ( page 159) is set to “On.”

•When you want to record both stereo 1 and stereo 2

sounds from a DV format digital video camera, additionally

make a connection to the audio input jacks on this recorder

using cables such as audio/video cables supplied with the

DV format digital video camera. ( page 37)

•If a DV format digital video camera is not recognized, pull

out the plug and connect it again.

•Some models of DV format digital video cameras may

support a different compression format. From such

equipment, recording is not possible.

•Depending on the models of DV format digital video

cameras, recording may not work properly or some

functions may be disabled.

•On an input source from a DV tape which is partly recorded

over, chapters may not made properly.

Editing

Library

To facilitate your collecting.

Using Library data

Searching for a desired title

Viewing the Library data

Checking remaining space

140

Library

Using Library data

The recorder has a “Library Management” database which memorizes various properties of recordings

made on this recorder, including date, media, title, genre, etc. Using this database, you can search for

desired or available discs.

You can utilize Library data as follows.

•To search for a DVD-RAM disc that contains a desired title.

•To check or change information of title or disc.

•To check the remaining space of a DVD-RAM disc.

Basic operation of the Library system

Notes

•To cancel this procedure, press the LIBRARY button.

•The Library system does not support DVD-R/RW discs.

•Selecting a title on the “LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles)”, and pressing the ENTER button begins playback of the

title if the disc containing the title is loaded.

•For proper function of the Library system, use DVD-RAM discs that shows a statement on its package such as “This disc can

copy images that permit copying once.” If you use a DVD-RAM disc without such a statement, and then operate it on other

device, the library data of the disc may not function properly.

•The “LIBRARY MENU” may not display all characters of a registered name of a disc.

1Press LIBRARY.

The “LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles)”

appears.

2Press QUICK MENU.

A Quick Menu appears.

3Press / to select an item, then press

ENTER.

For details on each item, see from the next page.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

TV/VIDEO CHANNEL

VOLUME

REMAIN

DIMMER

FL SELECT

ZOOM P in P

TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE

DISPLAY

INPUT SELECT

PROGRESSIVE

SAT.CONT. SAT.MONI. TV/DVR

LIBRARY

QUICK MENU

ENTER

HDD

DVD-RAM

Title Summary (All Titles)

LIBRARY

1/ 2

HDD

2004/06/20 19:00 Ch:519:00

23:00

19:00

21:00

23 00

2004/ 6/20

HDD

2004/06/19 23:00 Ch:4

2004/ 6/19

HDD

2004/06/18 19:00 Ch:3

2004/ 6/18

HDD

2004/06/17 21:00 Ch:3

2004/ 6/17

HDD

2004/06/13 23 00 Ch 4

2004/ 6/13

e.g. 

14:49

6/22 (Tu)

No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name

Title Summary (All Titles)

LIBRARY

1/ 2

HDD

2004/ 6/20

HDD

2004/ 6/19

HDD

2004/ 6/18

HDD

2004/ 6/17

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/11

HDD

2004/ 6/ 9

HDD

2004/ 6/ 8

2004/06/20 19:00 Ch:519:00

23:00

19:00

21:00

23:00

21:00

22:27

2004/06/19 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/18 19:00 Ch:3

2004/06/17 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/13 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/13 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/11 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 22:27 Ch:3

14:49

6/22 (Tu)

No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name

e.g.

Quick Menu

DVD space remaining

DVD all disc No.

Title information

Arrange

Narrowing

Jump

Disc information

Library management

Exit

141

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Searching for a desired title

From the “LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles)”, you can select a title by using the / buttons. If

you change the listing order or sort the titles, search may be easier.

Library

HDD

DVD-RAM

Changing the listing order

Arrange

1) From the Quick Menu, select “Arrange” by /

then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

2) Press / to select the listing order, then

press ENTER.

Titles are arranged in selected order.

Notes

•If you repeat the selection of different types of the listing

order, the old one precedes the new one. For example,

when you select “Arrange by genre” then “Arrange by disc

No.”, the order of genre is produced in the order of disc

number.

Searching

Narrowing

1) From the Quick Menu, select “Narrowing” by

/ then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

2) Press / to select a narrowing condition,

then press ENTER.

Sort by genre

The sub-menu appears.

Press the / buttons to select a genre, then press

the ENTER button.

Titles within the selected genre are sorted.

Sort by disc(DVD)

An input window appears.

Follow steps 1) and 2) below.

1) Press / to select a location, then press

ADJUST or / to enter the disc number.

2) Press ENTER.

Titles in the specified disc are sorted. For

example, if you enter “001-”, titles in discs 001,

001A and 001B are listed.

Sort By Disc(HDD)

Titles in the HDD are sorted.

Sort by day

The sub-menu appears.

Press the / buttons to select the day, then press

the ENTER button.

Titles recorded on the selected day are listed.

Notes

•Press the O button to go back to the display for the

previous narrowing condition.

•If you want to display all titles, press the QUICK MENU

button, then press the / buttons to select “Cancel

narrowings” and press the ENTER button.

LIBRARY

1/ 2

HDD

2004/ 6/20

HDD

2004/ 6/19

HDD

2004/ 6/18

HDD

2004/ 6/17

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/11

HDD

2004/ 6/ 9

HDD

2004/ 6/ 8

etc

...

e.g.

2004/06/20 19:00 Ch:519:00

23:00

19:00

21:00

23:00

21:00

22:27

2004/06/19 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/18 19:00 Ch:3

2004/06/17 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/13 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/13 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/11 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 22:27 Ch:3

Title Summary (All Titles)

14:49

6/22 (Tu)

No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name

Quick Menu

DVD space remaining

DVD all disc No.

Title information

Arrange

Narrowing

Jump

Disc information

Library management

Exit

Arrange by title name

Arrange by disc No.

Arrange by genre

Arrange by week

Arrange by date

LIBRARY

1/ 2

HDD

2004/ 6/20

HDD

2004/ 6/19

HDD

2004/ 6/18

HDD

2004/ 6/17

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/11

HDD

2004/ 6/ 9

e.g.

2004/06/20 19:00 Ch:519:00

23:00

19:00

21:00

23:00

21:00

2004/06/19 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/18 19:00 Ch:3

2004/06/17 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/13 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/13 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/11 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 21:00 Ch:3

Title Summary (All Titles)

14:49

6/22 (Tu)

No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name

Sort by disc

Disc No. 00 1 –

LIBRARY

1/ 2

HDD

2004/ 6/20

HDD

2004/ 6/19

HDD

2004/ 6/18

HDD

2004/ 6/17

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/11

HDD

2004/ 6/ 9

HDD

2004/ 6/ 8

etc

...

2004/06/20 19:00 Ch:519:00

23:00

19:00

21:00

23:00

21:00

22:27

2004/06/19 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/18 19:00 Ch:3

2004/06/17 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/13 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/13 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/11 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 22:27 Ch:3

Title Summary (All Titles)

14:49

6/22 (Tu)

No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name

e.g.

Quick Menu

DVD space remaining

DVD all disc No.

Title information

Arrange

Narrowing

Jump

Disc information

Library management

Exit

Sort by genre

Sort by disc(DVD)

Sort by disc(HDD)

Sort by day

142

Searching for a desired title (Continued)

Library

Jumping

Jump

1) From the Quick Menu, select “Jump” by /

then press ENTER.

The sub-menu appears.

2) Press / to select the jump method, then

press ENTER.

Appoint character

An input window appears.

Perform steps 1) to 3) below.

1) Put the cursor on the input area, and press

ENTER.

The on-screen keyboard appears.

2) Enter the first characters (up to three

characters) of the title you are looking for.

3) Press to select “Jump” and press ENTER.

The title that starts with the specified characters is

selected.

Note

•The input window of “Specific character jump” can be

shifted by pressing the / buttons.

Appoint disc No.

The on-screen keyboard appears.

Perform steps 1) and 2) below.

1) Press / to select the position to enter and

press ADJUST or / to enter the disc number.

Input 3 digits, and, if necessary A or B of disc. If

you input “–”, you can leave the digit and the lower

unspecified to search. For example, when “1 0 – –”

is input, titles of disc number such as 100, 100A,

102 are searched, and a title list starting from the

first found one appears. It is recommended that you

execute “Arrange by disc No.” beforehand.

2) Press ENTER.

The titles of the selected number disc are

displayed.

Specific page

An input window appears.

Perform steps 1) and 2) below.

1) Press / or ADJUST to enter the page

number.

2) Press ENTER.

The selected page is displayed.

LIBRARY

1/ 2

HDD

2004/ 6/20

HDD

2004/ 6/19

HDD

2004/ 6/18

HDD

2004/ 6/17

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/11

HDD

2004/ 6/ 9

HDD

2004/ 6/ 8

etc

...

e.g.

2004/06/20 19:00 Ch:519:00

23:00

19:00

21:00

23:00

21:00

22:27

2004/06/19 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/18 19:00 Ch:3

2004/06/17 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/13 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/13 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/11 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 22:27 Ch:3

Title Summary (All Titles)

14:49

6/22 (Tu)

No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name

Specific Disc No. Jump

Disc No. 00 1 –

LIBRARY

1/ 2

HDD

2004/ 6/20

HDD

2004/ 6/19

HDD

2004/ 6/18

HDD

2004/ 6/17

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/11

HDD

2004/ 6/ 9

HDD

2004/ 6/ 8

etc

...

e.g.

2004/06/20 19:00 Ch:519:00

23:00

19:00

21:00

23:00

21:00

22:27

2004/06/19 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/18 19:00 Ch:3

2004/06/17 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/13 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/13 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/11 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 22:27 Ch:3

Title Summary (All Titles)

14:49

6/22 (Tu)

No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name

Specific page jump

Page Number – – –

LIBRARY

1/ 2

HDD

2004/ 6/20

HDD

2004/ 6/19

HDD

2004/ 6/18

HDD

2004/ 6/17

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/11

HDD

2004/ 6/ 9

HDD

2004/ 6/ 8

etc

...

e.g.

2004/06/20 19:00 Ch:519:00

23:00

19:00

21:00

23:00

21:00

22:27

2004/06/19 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/18 19:00 Ch:3

2004/06/17 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/13 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/13 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/11 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 22:27 Ch:3

Title Summary (All Titles)

14:49

6/22 (Tu)

No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name

LIBRARY

1/ 2

HDD

2004/ 6/20

HDD

2004/ 6/19

HDD

2004/ 6/18

HDD

2004/ 6/17

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/11

HDD

2004/ 6/ 9

HDD

2004/ 6/ 8

etc

...

e.g.

2004/06/20 19:00 Ch:519:00

23:00

19:00

21:00

23:00

21:00

22:27

2004/06/19 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/18 19:00 Ch:3

2004/06/17 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/13 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/13 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/11 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 22:27 Ch:3

Title Summary (All Titles)

14:49

6/22 (Tu)

No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name

Specific character jump

Character String: Jump

143

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Viewing Library data

This section explains how to check and maintain the Library data.

HDD

DVD-RAM

Library

Viewing title information

Title information

1) From the Quick Menu, select “Title information”

by / then press ENTER.

You can view information about the selected title.

You can do the following operations with the Quick

Menu.

(Press the QUICK MENU button to display the Quick

Menu. Press / buttons to select an item and press

ENTER.)

“Edit title name”:

The on-screen keyboard appears.

Following the procedure on page 30, enter a new

name for the title.

“Edit chapter name”:

(Press the PICTURE SEARCH ( /) button to

display the chapter that you want to put a name for,

and select the chapter.)

The on-screen keyboard appears.

Following the procedure on page 30, enter a new

name for the chapter.

“Del chapter name”:

(Press the PICTURE SEARCH ( /) button to

display the chapter that you want to put a name for,

and select the chapter.)

“Record date & time”:

The cursor moves to the date so that you can correct

it.

“Lock”

Set the protection for the currently selected title.

The protection icon “” appears.

“Genre”:

The sub-menu appears.

Press the / buttons to select a genre, then press

the ENTER button.

A name of the selected genre and the icon appear.

Note

•When you change settings of a DVD-RAM disc, load

the DVD-RAM disc.

Viewing disc information

Disc information

1) From the Quick Menu, select “Dics

information” by / then press ENTER.

You can view information about the loaded disc.

To change the number or name of the DVD-RAM

disc:

1) Press / to select “Edit Disc Number” or

“Edit Disc Name”, then press the ENTER

button.

2) Following the procedure on page 30, enter

a new name for the disc.

To change the disc number, press the ADJUST

button.

Note

•You can also change a disc name of a DVD-RW if it is not

finalized yet.

Title information

CONTENT

(2:06:32)

7/11(Su) 22:00

2004/07/11 22:00 Ch:3 2004

Title : 006

(0:04:15)

Media : Documentary/Culture(General)

Mode :

Rate :

Audio :

0001

Chapter :

Original

2. 2

D/ M1

Off

DVD Mode :

Saving :

HDD

e.g.

Title informatin

CONTENT

(2:06:32)

7/11(Su) 22:00

2004/07/11 22:00 Ch:3 2004

Title : 006

(0:04:15)

Media : Documentary/Culture(General)

Mode :

Rate :

Audio :

0001

Chapter :

Original

2. 2

D/ M1

Off

DVD Mode :

Saving :

HDD

e.g.

Quick Menu

Edit title name

Edit chapter name

Del chapter name

Record date & time

Lock

Genre

Exit

Disc information

CONTENT

−

Disc Type Record Time (h:m)

Remain Time (h:m)

Edit Disc Number

Edit Disc Name

DVD-RAM

VR mode

1:51

0:10

0:05

0:10

0:22

0:07

0:15

D/M1:

L-PCM

D/M1:

D/M2:

D/M1:

4.6Mbps /

6.6Mbps /

4.6Mbps /

2.2Mbps /

6.0Mbps /

3.2Mbps /

(

Current)

Normal

Lock Off

001

Writing Mode

Original Titles

Playlist Titles

Disc Status

Disc Lock

–

Finalize

Video Create

Possible

Increment Rec

e.g.

144

Viewing Library data (Continued)

Library

Maintenance of Library data

The recorder usually controls the Library database

system automatically. However, in the following cases,

you must maintain and create data manually.

•When you want to add information about a title, (for

example when you use a DVD-RAM disc recorded

on another device, etc.), to the Library system of the

recorder.

→ “Registering a disc manually” ( page 144).

•When the Library database memory is full. (Up to

3000 entries can be registered. When you reach this

limit, a message will appear and further additions to the

Library database will be rejected. Erase unnecessary

data to make space.)

→ “Erasing unnecessary data” ( page 145).

•When you want to rearrange the whole Library

information from the beginning.

→ “Deleting all the Library information only” ( page

145).

•

When you save the Library data in another DVD-

RAM disc.

→ “Saving the Library data in a DVD-RAM disc” (

page 146).

•When you import saved Library data back into the

recorder.

→ “Re-installing the backup data” ( page 146).

Note

•Save your Library data on a DVD-RAM disc. Importing

Library data replaces all current database information in

the recorder, including any data added after you saved the

data onto a DVD-RAM disc.

Registering a disc manually

1) Load a DVD-RAM disc that contains information

you want to add.

2) Press LIBRARY.

3) Press QUICK MENU.

4) Press / to select “Library management”,

then press ENTER.

A sub-menu appears.

5) Press / to select “Add disc”, then press

ENTER.

6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.

To cancel, select “No”.

All title information is registered.

Notes

•To use title information in a DVD-RAM disc recorded on

another device, as the Library data of the recorder, be sure

to follow the procedure of “Registering a disc manually” to

add said data to the Library system. This information

cannot be added automatically.

•If you record content on a DVD-RAM disc on the recorder

and edit the content on the other device, Library data of the

disc may be lost or the disc may not function properly.

•Unless a DVD-RAM disc is registered to the recorder,

information of current or future titles recorded on the disc,

will not registered.

•By registering a disc manually, several discs in same

number consequently may be registered. In this case, the

remaining time is displayed per disc or page. Execution of

“Edit Disc Number” ( page 143) is recommended.

LIBRARY

1/ 2

HDD

2004/ 6/20

HDD

2004/ 6/19

HDD

2004/ 6/18

HDD

2004/ 6/17

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/13

HDD

2004/ 6/11

HDD

2004/ 6/ 9

HDD

2004/ 6/ 8

etc

...

e.g.

2004/06/20 19:00 Ch:519:00

23:00

19:00

21:00

23:00

21:00

22:27

2004/06/19 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/18 19:00 Ch:3

2004/06/17 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/13 23:00 Ch:4

2004/06/13 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/11 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 21:00 Ch:3

2004/06/ 9 22:27 Ch:3

Title Summary (All Titles)

14:49

6/22 (Tu)

No. Date Day Time CH Genre Title Name

Quick Menu

DVD space remaining

DVD all disc No.

Title information

Arrange

Narrowing

Jump

Disc information

Library management

Exit

Add disc

Del title information

Del title information by disc

Delete all DVD-RAM information

Delete all library information

Delete disc no. from library

Create backup

Re-inst all backup

145

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Erasing unnecessary data

When the Library database is full (3000 entries).→

Select “Del title information”.

1) Press LIBRARY.

2) Press / to select a title.

3) Press QUICK MENU.

4) Press / to select “Library management”

then press ENTER.

5) Press / to select “Del title information”, then

press ENTER.

6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.

Library data of the title selected in step 2) is

erased.

To cancel, select “No”.

To delete information of all titles in the specified data

→ Select “Del title information by disc”.

1) Press LIBRARY.

2) Press / to select a title.

3) Press QUICK MENU.

4) Press / to select “Library management”

then press ENTER.

5) Press / to select “Del title information by

disc”, then press ENTER.

6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.

Library data of all titles in the disc you selected in

step 2) is erased.

To cancel, select “No”.

Deleting all the Library information only

Use this feature when you want to rearrange the

whole Library information from the beginning.

1) Press LIBRARY.

2) Press QUICK MENU.

3) Press / to select “Library management” and

press ENTER.

4) Press / to select “Delete All DVD-RAM

information” or “Delete all library information”.

Delete all DVD-RAM information:

Deletes all Library information from the DVD-RAM

disc, leaving the Library information on the HDD.

Delete all library information:

Deletes all Library information from the HDD and

DVD-RAM disc.

5) Press ENTER.

6) Press / to select “Yes” and press ENTER.

Forced deletion of disc numbers

A number of an inactive disc can be deleted from the

Library Management, so that it can be assigned to a

new disc.

1) Press LIBRARY.

2) Press QUICK MENU.

3) Press / to select “Library management”,

then press ENTER.

4) Press / to select “Del disc no. from Library”,

then press ENTER.

5) Press ADJUST to select a number to delete,

then press ENTER.

Note

•Deleting a disc number also deletes data of all titles in the

disc.

146

Saving the Library data in a DVD-RAM disc

1) Load a DVD-RAM disc to save the Library data.

2) Press LIBRARY.

3) Press QUICK MENU.

4) Press / to select “Library management”,

then press ENTER.

5) Press / to select “Create backup”, then

press ENTER.

6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.

To cancel, select “No”.

Re-installing the backup data

1) Load the DVD-RAM disc containing the Library

database.

2) Press LIBRARY.

3) Press QUICK MENU.

4) Press / to select “Library management”,

then press ENTER.

5) Press / to select “Re-inst all backup”, then

press ENTER.

6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.

To cancel, select “No”.

Note

•Do not use a DVD-RAM disc which contains Library

Management data registered to another recorder for

backup data storage. Library Management format may vary

depending on the model. Adding data of a new format onto

the said disc may prevent the data of the older format from

being re-installed.

Viewing Library data (Continued)

Library

147

Playback

Recording Editing Function setup Others

Introduction Library

Viewing a number and space of a disc

DVD all disc No.

1) From the Quick Menu, select “DVD all disc No.”

by / then press ENTER.

You can view numbers, names and estimated

remaining spaces about all the registered discs.

To recheck the remaining space for a different “AV

record quality” setting

1) Press QUICK MENU.

The Quick Menu appears.

2) Press / to select “AV record quality” then

press ENTER.

3) Press ADJUST and select the setting ( page

161).

4) Press ENTER.

Note

•It is recommended that beforehand you select a desired

title or disc by “arrange” selection then execute “DVD

space remaining”, because the recorder lists the remaining

space from the specified disc or the one which contains the

specified title.

Checking remaining space

You can check the remaining space of each disc prior to recording.

Library

HDD

DVD-RAM

Viewing remaining space

DVD space remaining

1) From the Quick Menu, select “DVD space

remaining” by / then press ENTER.

You can view the recording titles and the estimated

space remaining per disc.

Note

•You can rearrange the list by selecting “Arrange”,

“Narrowing” or “Jump” from the Quick Menu.

DVD All disc No. Summary

LIBRARY

1/ 2

e.g.

No.

Estimated

Disc Name

001 20min.Spanish Conversation vol.1

002 10min.Spanish Conversation vol.2

003 5min.Movie

AV quality calculation can be changed from Quick Menu.

Manual 6.6 L-PCMCurrent defaul.

004 2min.Live Concert

14:49

6/22 (Tu)

HDD DVD

Custom setting

Setting

Total recording time: approx. 122 min.

(with 4.7 GB unused)

Manual

6.6

Mode

Rate

Audio quality

Manual1

Setting 1

L-PCM

D/M1

Manual

6.6

4.6

2.2

6.0

3.2

4.6

D/M1

L-PCM

D/M1

D/M2

D/M1

AV record quality

Setting 2

Function Setup

You can change the default settings to customize

performance to your preference.

Customizing the function

settings

150

Function Setup

Customizing the function settings

You can change the default settings to customize performance to your preference.

Notes

•The SETUP button can function

even during normal playback.

However some items may be

grayed out and they cannot be

selected. In this case, try again

after playback is stopped.

•The SETUP button does not

function during recording,

Recorded Title Play, Chase Play

or Pause TV modes.

1During stop, press SETUP.

The following setup display appears.

Press / to select the icon of a group that

contains a desired item, then press ENTER.

For details on each setting, see the next page.

e.g. When “Display settings” is selected:

3Press / to select a desired item, then press

ENTER.

4Refer to the explanations on pages beginning

from 154, to change the selection by / or

other buttons, then press ENTER.

•To select another item in the same group, repeat

steps 3 to 4.

•To shift to another group, press the O button then

repeat steps 2 to 4.

5Press SETUP.

The setup display disappears and the setting is

completed.

TIMESLIP

HDD DVD

EASY

NAVI

INSTANT SKIPINSTANT REPLAY

SETUP ENTER

T.SEARCH

CLEAR

312

REC MODE

EXTEND

TV CODE

456

DELETE

789

PLAYSTOPPAUSE

REC

LIBRARY

REC MENU EDIT MENU

CONTENT MENU

ANGLE

OPEN/CLOSE

SUBTITLE

AUDIO

CHANNEL

QUICK MENU

TOP MENU

RETURN

DVD

ENTER

VIDEO Plus+

Open the lid.

SETUP

e.g.

DVD subtitle language

DVD d i l

DVD audio language

DVD player settings

DVD disc menu language English

English

No subtitle

SETUP

e.g.

Transparency

Startup screen

On screen display

Display settings

Background

Screen protector

TV shape 4:3LB

25%

Blue

SETUP

ENTER

SETUP

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

151

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

Setting

DVD player settings

DVD disc menu language

DVD-VIDEO

DVD audio language

DVD-VIDEO

DVD subtitle language

DVD-VIDEO

DVD dynamic range control

DVD-VIDEO

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Karaoke vocal

DVD-VIDEO

DVD parental lock

DVD-VIDEO

DVD title stop

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

DVD-R

PBC

VCD

Picture/audio settings

PAL/Auto

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

Pause/still

DVD-VIDEO

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Custom picture select

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

Custom picture setting

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

Progressive conversion

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

Play DNR

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

Audio out select

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD CD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

Virtual surround

DVD-VIDEO

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

NICAM

HDD

DVD-RAM

(Continued)

Page

154

155

156

157

158

Details

To select a preferred language for disc menus.

To select a preferred language for the sound track.

To select a preferred language for subtitles.

To turn on or off a function that makes faint sounds easier to

hear even if you lower the volume during late-hour playback.

To turn on or off the vocal output during DVD KARAOKE disc

playback.

To turn the parental lock function on or off.

To turn on or off a feature that automatically stops playback

after a title has been viewed.

To use the menu screen when playing a PBC-controllable

VIDEO CD.

To select the video system of a disc.

To select the resolution of still pictures. (Field/Frame)

To select from standard or three customized picture settings.

To customize picture quality settings and store them.

To select the system of output signal. (Only when connected

to a PROGRESSIVE TV.)

To select a setting for playback at a reduced noise level.

To select an output sound format corresponding to your

system connection.

To turn on or off expansive virtual surround sound effects from

just two speakers.

To select a sound type for NICAM programme.

152

Setting

Display settings

TV shape

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

On screen display

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD CD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

Transparency

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD CD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

Startup screen

Screen protector

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD CD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

Background

Operational settings

Operation beep

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD CD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

Recording complete beep

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

IR code

Instant skip interval

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD CD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

Instant replay interval

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

VCD CD

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

Title thumbnail point

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

HDD/RAM title play

HDD

DVD-RAM

Still group interval

DVD-RAM

Priority contents

Details

To select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your

TV.

To turn on or deactivate the operational status display (e.g., )

on the TV screen.

To select the transparency of the GUI relative to background

pictures.

To turn on or off the start-up screen setting that makes the

background picture appear automatically when turning on the power.

To turn the screen saver on or off.

To select a display status when no video signals are present.

To turn on or off the confirmation beeper announcing when

each remote command is received.

To select whether or not a buzzer sounds when dubbing and

so forth is finished.

To switch the codes that operate the recorder.

To set the width to skip when the INSTANT SKIP button is

pressed once.

To set the width to go back when the INSTANT REPLAY

button is pressed once.

To select the position of the thumbnail image counting from

the beginning of the title that has been recorded.

To activate resume play per title or continuous play.

To select an interval of still picture display.

To select the playback priority between JPEG (picture) files

and MP3/WMA (audio) files.

Page

159

160

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Function Setup

153

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

See page 28, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”.

Setting

DVD recorder operation

AV record quality

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Picture record mode

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Audio input level

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Aspect ratio(video mode)

DVD-RW

DVD-R

DVD compatible mode

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

DVD-Video:CHP create

DVD-RW

DVD-R

Relay recording

HDD

DVD-RAM

Management settings

Genre setting

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Eco. mode

HDD auto stop

HDD

All HDD titles delete

HDD

HDD format

HDD

DVD-RAM physical format

DVD-RAM

Software version

DVD drive software

Initial settings

Details

To select a set of picture and sound quality settings for

manual programme recording.

To make further setting when you cannot adjust the image

quality with “Custom picture setting” of the “Picture/audio

settings”.

To adjust the level of recording sound.

To set the aspect ratio for DVD-R/RW recording.

To set the audio for DVD-R/RW recording.

To set whether or not chapters are to be automatically created

at a specified interval for DVD-R/RW recording.

To turn on or off a function that makes a recording

automatically onto the HDD when the remainder of the

DVD-RAM disc becomes less than 10 minutes or when a disc

is not loaded.

To register the frequently used genre in the menu.

To set the front panel display to turn on/off in the standby

mode.

To turn on or off a power saving function that stops the HDD

after a certain period of inactivity.

To delete all the titles recorded on the HDD, leaving the

Library information on the DVD-RAM disc.

To initialize the HDD.

To perform physical formatting of a DVD-RAM disc.

To display the version of the software. The version is only

displayed and cannot be set.

To display the version of the DVD drive software.

The version is only displayed and it cannot be set.

Page

161

162

163

164

154

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Function Setup

German:

To play sound tracks recorded in German.

Spanish:

To play sound tracks recorded in Spanish.

Italian:

To play sound tracks recorded in Italian.

Others:

To make further choices.

After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1) - 4)

below.

1) Obtain the language code of the preferred

language from the Language code list

( page 171).

2) Select the first character by pressing the

/ buttons (or the ADJUST button).

3) Press the / buttons to shift. Select the

second character by pressing the /

buttons (or the ADJUST button).

4) Press the ENTER button.

Note

•Some DVD video discs may be played in a different

language from that you selected. A prior language may be

programmed by the disc.

DVD Subtitle Language

DVD-VIDEO

English:

To display subtitles in English.

French:

To display subtitles in French.

German:

To display subtitles in German.

Spanish:

To display subtitles in Spanish.

Italian:

To display subtitles in Italian.

No subtitle:

To disable subtitles.

DVD player settings

DVD disc menu language

DVD-VIDEO

English:

To display disc menus in English.

French:

To display disc menus in French.

German:

To display disc menus in German.

Spanish:

To display disc menus in Spanish.

Italian:

To display disc menus in Italian.

Others:

To make a further language choice.

After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1) – 4)

below.

1) Obtain the language code of the preferred

language from the Language code list

( page 171).

2) Select the first character by pressing the

/ buttons (or the ADJUST button).

3) Press the / buttons to shift. Select the

second character by pressing the /

buttons (or the ADJUST button).

4) Press the ENTER button.

Note

•Some DVD video discs may not include your preset

language. In this case, the recorder automatically displays

disc menus consistent with the disc’s initial language

setting.

DVD audio language

DVD-VIDEO

English:

To play sound tracks recorded in English.

French:

To play sound tracks recorded in French.

SETUP

e.g.

DVD subtitle language

DVD d

namic ran

e control

DVD audio language

DVD player settings

DVD disc menu language English

English

No subtitle

Code

SETUP

e.g.

DVD subtitle language

DVD dynamic range control

DVD player settings

Karaoke vocal

DVD disc menu language English

English

No subtitle

Off

Code

DVD audio language

155

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

Others:

To make a further choice.

After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1) – 4)

below.

1) Obtain the language code of the preferred

language from the Language code list

( page 171).

2) Select the first character by pressing the

/ buttons (or the ADJUST button).

3) Press the / buttons to shift. Select the

proceeding character by pressing the /

buttons (or the ADJUST button).

4) Press the ENTER button.

Notes

•Some DVD video discs may be set to display subtitles in a

different language from that you selected. A prior subtitle

language may be programmed by the disc.

•Some DVD video discs allow you to change subtitle

selections only via the disc menu. In this case, press the

MENU button and choose the appropriate subtitle

language from the selection on the disc menu.

DVD dynamic range control

DVD-VIDEO

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Turns on or off a function that makes faint sounds easier

to hear even if you lower the volume during late-hour

playback.

Off:

The DVD dynamic range control does not function.

On:

The DVD dynamic range control functions.

Notes

•This function is available only for a disc recorded in Dolby

Digital format.

•Depending on the disc you play back, the actual effect of

this function differs.

Karaoke vocal

DVD-VIDEO

Off:

The main vocal sound is not output.

On:

The main vocal sound is output.

Notes

•This function is available only for a DVD KARAOKE disc

recorded in Dolby Digital Multi Channel format.

•If you want to enjoy the KARAOKE function, connect an

amplifier or other such device to this recorder.

DVD parental lock

DVD-VIDEO

DVD video discs equipped with the Parental Lock

function have a predetermined limitation level. The

limitation level or limitation method may differ depending

on the disc. For example the total disc may not be played

back, or an extreme violent scene maybe cut or replaced

automatically by another scene.

Important

•Depending on discs, it may not be evident whether the

disc is compatible with the Parental Lock function.

Make sure that the Parental Lock function you set is

activated correctly.

On:

Select this to activate the Parental Lock function or to

change the setting.

After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1) – 3)

below.

Off:

Deactivate the Parental Lock function.

After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1)

below.

1) Enter a 4-digit password by using the

number buttons, then press the ENTER

button.

If you make a mistake entering your password,

press the CLEAR button before pressing the

ENTER button, and re-enter the correct password.

Press the / / / buttons to move the

cursor. Then press the ADJUST button to

enter the code of a country/area whose

standards were used to rate the DVD video

disc, referring to the following list (next page).

(Continued)

SETUP

e.g.

DVD subtitle language

DVD dynamic range control

DVD player settings

Karaoke vocal

DVD disc menu language English

English

No subtitle

Off

Code

––

DVD audio language

156

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Function Setup

Country/Area Code

AUSTRALIA AU

BELGIUM BE

CANADA CA

CHINA CN

CHINA HONG KONG HK

DENMARK DK

FINLAND FI

FRANCE FR

GERMANY DE

INDONESIA ID

ITALY IT

JAPAN JP

MALAYSIA MY

NETHERLANDS NL

NORWAY NO

PHILIPPINES PH

RUSSIAN FEDERATION RU

SINGAPORE SG

SPAIN ES

SWEDEN SE

SWITZERLAND CH

TAIWAN TW

THAILAND TH

UNITED KINGDOM GB

UNITED STATES US

3) Select the desired limitation level by

pressing the / buttons, and then press

the ENTER button.

Unless the Parental Lock function is set to

“Off”, a disc that has a higher limitation level

than your selected limitation level cannot be

played back. For example, if you select level 7,

discs exceeding level 8 are locked and cannot

be played back.

When “US” is selected, its limitation level

corresponds to the following settings.

Level 7 : NC-17 Level 3 : PG

Level 6 : R Level 1 : G

Level 4 : PG13

To change the limitation level of the Parental

Lock function

Follow step 1) - 3) above.

To change the password

1) Press the STOP button 4 times after

selecting “On” and “Off” in order, and then

press the ENTER button.

The password is cleared.

2) Enter a new 4-digit password by using the

number buttons.

3) Press the ENTER button.

DVD title stop

DVD-RW

DVD-VIDEO

DVD-R

Off:

Plays back all following titles on the disc after the

current title has been viewed.

On:

Recorder is stopped after playback of current title

being viewed is completed.

PBC

VCD

Off:

Selects normal playback without using the menu

screen of a PBC-controllable VIDEO CD.

On:

Selects playback using the menu screen of a PBC-

controllable VIDEO CD.

SETUP

e.g.

DVD parental lock level setting

Area code

Level 8

Level 7

Level 6

Level 5

Level 4

Level 3

Level 2

Level 1

Prohibited

Allowed

U S

157

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

Picture/Audio settings

PAL/Auto

DVD-VIDEO

VCD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

PAL:

To play a PAL disc. Connect a PAL TV to view a

picture.

Auto:

The recorder automatically identifies PAL or NTSC

video system of a disc. Connect a multisystem TV

(PAL/NTSC compatible) to view a picture.

A playback picture may be distorted when detected a

signal change between PAL and NTSC on the disc.

Note:

Alert message is displayed when detected both PAL

and NTSC video system on the same disc.

Pause/Still

DVD-VIDEO

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Auto:

Normal setting. Pause the moving image without

blurring.

Frame:

Displays high resolution still image.

Custom picture select

DVD-VIDEO

VCD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Select from between 4 picture settings (Normal, Setting

1-3) you stored in the memory.

Custom picture setting

DVD-VIDEO

VCD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

You can adjust fine picture quality and store up to 3

custom picture settings in the memory of the recorder.

1) Press the / button to select a desired

setting from 3 settings, and then press the

ENTER button.

2) Press the / buttons to select adjustable

items, and then press the / buttons to

select each parameter.

Brightness

(0) Darker ⇔ Brighter (7)

Contrast

(–7) Lower ⇔ Higher (0)

Color

(–7) Duller ⇔ Brighter (0)

Edge enhance

(OFF) Normal ⇔ Sharp (ON)

3) After adjusting the items, press the ENTER

button.

Progressive conversion

DVD-VIDEO

VCD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

There are two types of source content in pictures

recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures

recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and video

content (video signals recorded at 25 frames in PAL (30

frames in NTSC) per second). Make this selection

according to the type of content being viewed.

Auto:

Select this position normally.

The recorder automatically detects source content,

film or video, of playback source, and converts that

signal in the progressive output format in an

appropriate method.

Video:

The recorder filters video signal, and converts it in the

progressive output format appropriately.

Suitable for playback of video content pictures.

Film:

The recorder converts film content pictures in the

progressive output format appropriately.

Suitable for playback of film content pictures.

The progressive output feature will be most effective

under this selection.

Note

•Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or doubled.

SETUP

e.g.

Custom picture select

Off

Virtual surround

NICAM

PALPAL/Auto

Normal

Picture/Audio settings

Play DNR

Pause / Still Auto

Auto

Progressive conversion

Bitstream

Audio out select

Setting 1

Setting 2

Setting 3

Custom picture setting

158

Play DNR

DVD-VIDEO

VCD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Selects a setting for playback at a reduced noise level.

Press the / buttons to select an item then select “On”

or “Off” using the / buttons.

3D-DNR:

Off:

Not activated.

On:

Reduces the noise levels of brightness signals and

color signals present in the video signal during

playback.

Mosquito NR:

Off:

Not activated.

On:

Reduces mosquito (flicker) noise occurring in the

contour sections of images.

Block NR:

Off:

Not activated.

On:

Reduces noise that appears in the form of blocks

(block noise) in a portion of the screen during

playback of images with rapid movement.

DNR is the abbreviation for Digital Noise Reduction.

Notes

•DNR effects vary depending on the disc.

•Detailed images may no longer be visible depending on

the scene due to the effects of DNR.

•Depending on the disc or scene, “On” may produce

undesirable picture artifacts or increase noises on

contours. In this instance, select “Off.”

•While you are using the zoom feature, “DNR” does not

function.

Audio out select

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Selects an output sound format corresponding to your

audio system connection.

For details about output sound selection, see page 75.

Bitstream:

Select this when an amplifier equipped with built-in

Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG1 decoder is connected to

this recorder.

When you play back a disc recorded in Dolby Digital,

DTS or MPEG1 format, digital audio signal is output.

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Function Setup

Analog 2ch:

Select this when a TV or other audio device is

connected to this recorder via the ANALOG output

connectors.

PCM:

Select this when a 2ch digital stereo amplifier is

connected to this recorder. When you play back a disc

recorded in Dolby Digital or MPEG1 format, the sound

is converted to the PCM (2ch) format and output.

Virtual surround

DVD-VIDEO

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

This lets you playback discs with acoustic effects having

greater depth and presence even when using only two

speakers.

Off:

Virtual surround effect not activated.

On:

Virtual surround effect activated.

Notes

•This function is only activated when playing back a disc

recorded with Dolby Digital.

•This function is only activated when “Audio Out Select” is

set to “PCM” if the BITSTREAM/PCM jack of this DVD

recorder is connected to an amplifier or similar device.

•When the virtual surround effect is activated, Dolby

Progressive Sound may be deactivated or sound differently

than usual.

•When the virtual surround effect is activated, the volume

may sound differently than usual.

•Set “Virtual surround” to “Off” if the audio sounds distorted.

Manufactured under license from QSound Labs, Inc. U.S. patent

Nos. 5,105,462, 5,208,860 and 5,440,638 and various foreign

NICAM

HDD

DVD-RAM

NICAM programmes are divided into 3 types. NICAM

Stereo, NICAM Mono and Mode I/Mode II (transmission in

another language). NICAM programmes are always

accompanied by a standard mono sound broadcast and you

can select the desired sound on the screen (for recording).

Off:

Only set at this position to record the standard mono

sound during a NICAM broadcast if the stereo sound

is distorted due to inferior reception conditions.

On:

Normally set at this position.

159

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

Display settings

TV Shape

DVD-VIDEO

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your

TV.

For details on this setting, see “TV shape setting”

( page 50, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”).

On screen display

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Off:

Deactivates the operational status display (e.g., ) on

the TV screen.

On:

Activates the operational status display (e.g., ) on

the TV screen.

Transparency

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Selects the transparency of the GUI and its relationship

to the background image.

0% : 25% : 50%

Startup screen

Off:

The startup screen is not displayed.

On:

The startup screen appears automatically when

turning on the power.

Screen protector

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

To reduce TV screen damage (image burn), this function

disengages the pause mode of a playback image. The

display returns to the normal TV screen when the

recorder remains idle for more than 15 minutes. In time

slip mode, the playback pause is released.

If this function is set to “On”, the recorder, if freezes, may

return to the normal by leaving it for about 15 minutes or

longer.

Off:

Deactivates the screen protector function.

On:

Activates the screen protector function.

Note

•Toshiba does not guarantee that this function protects the

TV screen by all means.

Background

Selects a screen colour when receiving no video signals

such as selecting a non-broadcasting channel.

Off:

No colour.

Black:

Black is displayed.

Blue:

Blue is displayed.

Important

•Depending on signal reception, the Background setting

may be cleared. To prevent this, set this function to

“Off”.

160

Operational settings

Operation beep

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Turn on or off a confirmation beeper announcing when a

command is received.

Off:

Turns off the beep sound.

On:

Turns on the beep sound.

Note

•You cannot turn off beeps for alerts irrespective of this

setting.

Recording complete beep

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

This is used to set whether or not a buzzer sounds when

dubbing and so forth is finished.

Off:

Buzzer does not sound.

On:

Buzzer sounds.

Note

•You cannot turn off beeps for alerts irrespective of this

setting.

IR Code

Switches the codes to operate the recorder. If you use

the second and third TOSHIBA HDD/DVD video

recorders, set the different remote codes for each

recorder to avoid confusion in the response of the

recorders.

For details about this setting, refer to “Operating the

second and third TOSHIBA HDD/DVD video recorders

with the remote control of this recorder” ( page 54,

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).

DR 1 : DR 2 : DR 3

Instant skip interval

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Sets how much time is skipped when the INSTANT SKIP

button is pressed.

5 sec. : 10 sec. : 30 sec. : 5 min.

Instant replay interval

DVD-VIDEO

VCD CD

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Sets how far back is replayed when the INSTANT

REPLAY button is pressed.

5 sec. : 10 sec. : 30 sec. : 5 min.

Title thumbnail point

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

For recorded titles, sets how far a scene from the start is

set as the title thumbnail.

0 sec. : 3 sec. : 10 sec. : 35 sec. : 1 min. : 5 min.

Note

•Thumbnails can also be changed to other scenes.

See page 100.

HDD/RAM title play

HDD

DVD-RAM

Sets the resume play per title.

Title resume:

Remembers the point where you stop playback.

Allows you to resume the playback from that point.

Serial playback:

You can play back titles (Original, Playlist) stored in

the HDD or a DVD-RAM continuously.

Because there is no division between titles, the

recorder remembers only the last point where you

stopped playback.

Still group interval

DVD-RAM

Sets an interval for display of still pictures (in seconds)

when playing back a collection of still images.

1 sec. : 2 sec. : 3 sec. : 5 sec. : 10 sec. : Default

Priority Contents

To select the playback priority between JPEG (picture)

files and MP3/WMA (audio) files.

Photo: JPEG files take priority over MP3/WMA files.

Audio: MP3/WMA files take priority over JPEG files.

Notes

•If this selection does not correspond to disc contents, the

recorder will take a longer time to start playback of the

disc.

•To change this setting to a loaded disc, open the disc tray

after the setting, then close the disc tray to have the

recorder read the disc again.

Function Setup

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

161

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

DVD recorder operation

AV record quality

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

You can select from 5 combined picture and sound

quality recording settings prior to actual recording.

Actual selection applied becomes the default setting for

the normal recording or programmed recording.

•To make a combination of picture and sound

quality settings.

Press the / / / buttons to select the

desired item (“Mode”, “Rate”, or “Audio quality”)

2) Press the ADJUST button to change the setting

of each item.

•To apply the combination of picture and sound

quality settings.

1) Press the / / / buttons to select a media

to record on (HDD or DVD).

2) Press the ADJUST button to change the

setting.

You can confirm the available recording time for

the selected setting on the bottom screen.

3) Press the ENTER button.

Notes

•A combination of picture and sound quality settings can be

set for HDD and DVD-RAM respectively.

•You can change the combination of picture and sound

quality settings also by displaying the Quick Menu on a

“LIBRARY MENU” or during stop mode, then selecting “AV

record quality”. Either of the above methods updates the

setting of this recorder.

•If you set “SP” or “LP”, you cannot select “L-PCM”.

•Depending on the sound quality settings, the upper limit for

the picture quality setting differs.

•You can adjust the manual rate for picture quality by

0.2 Mbps from 2.0 to 9.2. (You cannot set the rate from 1.4

to 2.0.)

Picture record mode

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Adjusts problems with the brightness of video signals of

TV broadcasts or other external input.

Press t

he / buttons to select the source, and the /

buttons to select the mode.

(Only use this setting when you cannot adjust the

brightness satisfactorily with the “Custom picture setting”

in the “Picture/Audio settings” ( Page 157) of this

recorder.)

Important:

•This setting changes the video signal to record and the

recorded signal is not returned to the original state even

when this setting is changed after recording. When

duplicating from VHS tape, if you can check the video

recording state beforehand, we recommend first playing

back for a while and checking the overall brightness

tendency, then setting an appropriate mode.

Standard:

The recorder records video signals of TV broadcasts

or other external input without adjusting their

brightness. Use this mode normally.

Mode 1:

The brightness of signals received with this recorder

and external input signals is adjusted automatically.

Mode 2:

This setting is used to record the signals darker when

the screen is too bright.

Mode 3, 4:

As the number rises, the signals are recorded brighter.

Use these modes to adjust the brightness.

Audio input level

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

Sets the audio input level of recorded sound.

Press the / buttons to select the desired item, and

then press the / buttons to adjust the input level.

RF (L):

Sets the input level for the left channel.

(R):

Sets the input level for the right channel.

Line, AV 1, AV 2 (L):

Sets the input level for the left channel of the external

input connectors.

(R):

Sets the input level for the right channel of the external

input connectors.

SETUP

e.g.

HDD DVD

Custom setting

Setting

Total recording time: 71min.

(with 4.7 GB unused)

Manual

6.6

Mode

Rate

Audio quality

Manual1

Setting 1 – – –

L-PCM

D/M1

Manual

6.6

4.6

2.2

6.0

3.2

4.6

D/M1

L-PCM

D/M1

D/M2

D/M1

AV record quality

162

Aspect ratio(video mode)

DVD-RW

DVD-R

To set the aspect ratio when recording onto a DVD-R/RW

disc.

4:3:

Fixes the aspect ratio at 4:3.

16:9:

Fixes the aspect ratio at 16:9.

Note

•When the bit rate on “AV record quality” is set to

“1.4(Mbps)”, pictures are recorded in 4:3 aspect ratio even

if “16:9” is selected.

DVD compatible mode

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

To set whether or not recording is to be performed in the

format for which recording is allowed by the DVD-Video

standard (video, audio and other data) during recording.

This selection is important for contents when recorded on

this recorder, if they will be copied to DVD-R/RW.

Off:

For recording of contents which will not be copied to

DVD-R/RW.

Both the left and right channel sounds are recorded.

When recording directly on a DVD-R/RW disc, this is

ineffective. The recorder will automatically regard this

as “On (Mode I),” and record sound of the main

channel only in stereo. Select “On (Mode I)” or “On

(Mode II)” for a DVD-R/RW recording.

On (Mode I):

Records sound of the left channel only in stereo.

On (Mode II):

Records sound of the right channel only in stereo.

Notes

•When you select the manual rate of the picture quality

between 3.0 and 3.8 and set this mode to “On (Mode I)” or

“On (Mode II)”, the picture quality may become lower than

when you set this mode to “Off”.

•You can change the setting from the Quick Menu.

•It is no use to make this selection when dubbing. Select

when recording.

DVD-Video:CHP create

DVD-RW

DVD-R

To set whether chapters are to be automatically created

at a selected interval during DVD-R/RW recording.

Off:

Chapters are not set.

5 min. : 10 min. : 15 min. : 20 min.

To set the interval at which chapters are automatically

created to 5, 10, 15 or 20 minutes.

Note

•The number of chapters has the upper limit, which varies

depending on the disc condition. If the number reaches it,

no more chapters are created.

Relay recording

HDD

DVD-RAM

Turn on or off a function that makes a recording

automatically onto the HDD when the remaining space of

a DVD-RAM disc is Reduced to less than 10 minutes or

when a disc is not loaded.

Off:

Deactivates this function.

On:

Activates this function.

Notes

•The Relay recording does not function during the Rate

conversion dubbing or Line-U dubbing.

•Even if you set “Relay recording” to “Off”, A-B programmed

recording will be performed on the HDD.

•During playback of the HDD when you start Relay

recording and the “CONTENT MENU” is displayed,

playback stops.

•During Relay recording, HDD Title Playback is not

available.

•When the remaining space on the HDD is small, Relay

recording does not function.

•Time slip function ( page 63) is not possible while “On”

is selected.

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Function Setup

163

Recording Playback Editing Library Function setup Others

Introduction

Management settings

Genre setting

DVD-RDVD-RW

HDD

DVD-RAM

This registers a frequently used genre name onto the

menu. Genre names registered here are displayed in the

“Genre” on the Quick Menu.

1) Press the / buttons to select a position in

the “Current genre list” you want to change,

then press the ENTER button.

A list of genres appears.

You can turn the pages using the button.

2) Press the / buttons to select a genre,

then press the ENTER button.

A list of genre names appears.

3) Press the / buttons to select a genre

name, then press the ENTER button.

The selected genre name replaces the previous

one of the position you selected at step 1).

Repeat steps 1) to 3) to register genre names.

5) When genre names are registered, press the

O button to return to the “Management

settings” menu.

Eco. mode

To set the front panel display to turn on/off in the standby

mode.

Off:

Sets the front panel display to turn on in the standby

mode.

On:

Sets the front panel display to turn off in the standby

mode.

HDD auto stop

HDD

Off:

Turns off an HDD auto stop mode.

On:

Turns HDD drive off after recorder is idle for

approximately 5 minutes.

When the PLAY or REC button is pressed for the HDD

while the HDD drive is turned off, it takes a little longer

time to play or record.

All HDD titles delete

HDD

This deletes all the titles on the HDD. Only the recorded

contents are deleted, so the DVD-RAM disc Library

information and reservation history are left as is and can

continue to be used.

1) Press the / buttons to select “Yes”, then

press the ENTER button.

2) Confirm the message, press the /

buttons to select “Yes” and then press the

ENTER button.

Deletion of all titles starts.

If you want to cancel the deleting, select “No”.

Note

•If you periodically execute All HDD titles delete, this holds

down fragmentation (increased complexity) of the disc and

maintains good operability.

Yes No

All titles are about to be deleted in

spite of title protected. Proceed?

164

HDD Format

HDD

Initializes the HDD.

Normally it is not required to initialize the HDD. However

when the HDD does not function correctly, initializing the

HDD may solve the situation. If you initialize the HDD, all

titles and Library information stored in the HDD are

permanently deleted.

1) Press the / buttons to select “Start”,

then press the ENTER button.

2) Confirm the message, press the /

buttons to select “Start”, and then press the

ENTER button.

Initialization of the HDD starts.

If you want to cancel the initializing, select

“Cancel”.

DVD-RAM physical format

DVD-RAM

See page 29.

Picture quality setting

Auto

Setting of picture and sound quality for recording

Sound setting

D/M1 D/M2 L-PCM

DVD

Yes

HDD

Yes

DVD

Yes

HDD

Yes

DVD

Yes

HDD

Yes

HDD Format

Start Cancel

Entire disc contents including

library will be erased

if disc is formatted. Proceed?

Format

e.g.

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Function Setup

Others

Before calling service personnel

Error codes on the display

window

Recording duration

Language code list

Specification

166

Before calling service personnel

If you experience any of the following difficulties while using this unit, check the list below before consulting your

nearest Toshiba dealer.

Others

Power

The power is not turned on.

•The power cord is not connected securely.

→Connect the power cord securely.

Connection to your TV

There is no TV picture.

•The video cable to this recorder and your TV is not

connected securely.

→Connect the video cable to this recorder and your

TV securely.

•The input select on your TV is not set property.

→Select the input to which this recorder is

connected.

TV reception

There is no picture.

•The antenna cable is not connected securely.

→Reconnect the antenna cable securely.

There is poor reception.

•Channel settings are not completed.

→Set the channel settings.

•The antenna cable is not connected securely.

→Reconnect the antenna cable securely.

•Antenna signal is poor.

→Consult your dealer for adjustment.

Playback

A DVD or CD does not play.

•The format of the recorded data does not correspond

to this recorder, or the region number is neither “1”

nor “ALL”.

→Check the disc.

•A defective or dirty disc is inside.

→Change the disc.

•The HDD mode is selected.

→Press the DVD button.

The HDD does not play.

•The DVD mode is selected.

→Press the HDD button.

During playback, picture noise appears.

•Picture noise may appear in the following cases. It is

not a malfunction.

→There is picture noise in the original recording.

→Weather, reception conditions may cause noise.

→The data transmission rate is set to low.

→The image data processing of this recorder cannot

follow dynamic movement on the screen. (Low

video data rate)

→A physical error has occurred on the DVD disc.

If an error occurs during reading data of a disc,

block-noises may be produced there. Repeated

reading of this location where the error occurred

(retry) can decrease the generation of block noise.

However, it can also raise the possibility of

unintended delays or stops of playback. In order to

prevent them, the recorder limits the number of

times of retry.

167

Recording Playback Others

Introduction Editing Function setup

Library

Program

Timer programming cannot be completed.

•Clock setting has not been completed.

→Complete the clock setting ( page 30,

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).

•The programs list is full.

→Cancel unwanted programs ( page 43).

VIDEO Plus+ recording does not work properly.

•Guide channel setting is not completed.

→Complete the guide channel setting ( page 37,

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).

Recording

Cannot be recorded on a DVD-RAM disc.

•The disc is protected from deleting data.

→Set the write-protect tab to the opposite of

“PROTECT” ( page 8).

•The disc is protected by a PC or the recorder.

→Disable the protection on the device which

protected the disc.

•The disc space is not sufficient.

→Delete unwanted data ( page 50) or prepare a

new disc.

•The disc is not initialized.

→Initialize the disc ( page 28).

•The disc may contain errors.

→Complete the physical format on the disc

( page 29).

•The physical format on the disc is not completed.

→Complete the physical format on the disc

( page 29).

•The disc has been recorded in the NTSC system.

You can replay a title that has been recorded in the

NTSC system, but you cannot display it in the

thumbnail or use the edit or dubbing functions.

→You can use the recorder to initialize the disc to

use it with this recorder, but the contents will be

lost. If you do not want to initialize the disc, you

can still play it, but no other functions are available.

Cannot be recorded on the HDD.

•The DVD mode is selected.

→Press the HDD button.

•The disc space of the HDD is not sufficient.

→Delete unwanted data ( page 50) or move the

contents to DVD-RAM discs ( page 106).

•Some causes such as power failure may set the

recorder to reject the operation to protect the HDD.

→Copy necessary contents recorded in the HDD to

a DVD-RAM disc, and initialize the HDD.

168

Remote control

The remote control does not work.

•The batteries in the remote control are exhausted.

→Replace all the batteries in the remote control

( page 12, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”).

•The light emitter of the remote control is not pointed

at the receptor of this recorder.

→Point the emitter of the remote control at the

receptor of this recorder.

•The receptor of this recorder is located too far away

from the remote control.

→Operate the remote control within 7 meters (23 ft)

from the receptor of this recorder.

•There are obstacles between the remote control and

this recorder.

→Remove any obstacles.

•The receptor is disturbed by sunlight or fluorescent

light.

→Change the place of this recorder or shield the

light.

•The remote control mode is not appropriate.

→Adjust the remote control mode of the remote

control and this recorder ( page 54,

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).

Clock

The clock blinks.

→Complete the initial setting again ( page 30,

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).

The clock does not keep time.

→Set the time and date manually ( page 35,

“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).

Before calling service personnel (Continued)

Others

169

Recording Playback Others

Introduction Editing Function setup

Library

Error codes on the display window

The recorder display shows error codes in addition to the message screen.

Main examples are as follows.

The “**” in the “ERR - **” message indicates an error code. To delete this display, press the DISPLAY

button on the remote control.

Note

• If you find an error code other than listed above, consult your nearest TOSHIBA dealer.

Error code

Description

ERR-01 Error detected in the physical format.

ERR-10 Exceeded volume detected.

ERR-11 Exceeded number of titles detected.

ERR-12 Exceeded number of chapters detected.

ERR-13 Copy protection information detected.

ERR-14 DVD disc access error detected.

ERR-15 Other errors detected.

ERR-16 HDD access error detected.

ERR-17 Wide image recorded at 1.4 Mbps detected.

ERR-18 Different aspects detected in the same part.

ERR-19 Different resolutions detected in the same part.

ERR-1A Different sound quality modes detected in the same

part.

ERR-1B Invalid control information detected.

ERR-1C Parts created in other recorder.

ERR-1D Parts created with “DVD compatible mode = Off”

detected.

ERR-1E Invalid parts detected.

ERR-1F Unexpected error detected.

ERR-2E Menu encode error detected.

ERR-2F Overflow of the menu size detected.

ERR-30 Exceeded maximum number of menus detected.

ERR-31 Recovery writing executed from compatibiliy of drive

and disc.

ERR-32 Incompatibility of disc format detected.

ERR-33 Disc protected.

ERR-34 Disc protected or system control data error detected.

ERR-35 Exceeded volume in disc budget calculation detected.

ERR-36 Recording failed. (Title not saved.)

ERR-31 Recording failed. (Title saved.)

ERR-38 Writing failed. (Title not reserved)

ERR-39 Writing failed. (Title saved.)

ERR-3A Unexpected error detected.

ER-7000 Possible error detected in the HDD.

• When creating a DVD-Video

• When recording on DVD-R/RW

• When dubbing to DVD-R/RW

• When recording on DVD-R/RW

Others

170

Recording duration

Others

•The recording duration listed above is reference only. Not guaranteed.

•This recording duration applies to the DVD-RAM disc in its initialized condition. The display may vary depending on

the disc.

•If you subtract the actual recording duration from the duration listed in this table, the calculated time period does not

represent the remaining time.

•The consumption of space may vary depending on the picture and sound conditions of the recorded content.

•Use the remaining disc space display feature to see the remaining space in the DVD-RAM disc.

For D /M1 and D /M2, the digital recording technology for consumer products of Dolby Laboratories is used.

Setting 1 ( D /M1) records in Dolby Digital at 192 kbps, and Setting 2 ( D /M2) records at 384 kbps.

1.4

2.0

2.2

2.4

2.6

2.8

3.0

3.2

3.4

3.6

3.8

4.0

4.2

4.4

4.6

4.8

5.0

5.2

5.4

5.6

5.8

6.0

6.2

6.4

6.6

6.8

7.0

7.2

7.4

7.6

7.8

8.0

8.2

8.4

8.6

8.8

9.0

9.2

106

Picture

quality rate

Hour Minute Hour Minute

Sound rate

D/M1(192kbps)

HDD DVD-RAM

Hour Minute Hour Minute

HDD DVD-RAM

Hour Minute Hour Minute

Remarks

L-PCM

HDD DVD-RAM

Picture quality rate for LP with D/M2.

Picture quality rate for LP with D/M1.

Picture quality rate for SP with D/M2.

Picture quality rate for SP with D/M1.

Manual maximum setting for L-PCM.

Maximum value for the manual mode.

D/M2(384kbps)

171

Recording Playback Others

Introduction Editing Function setup

Library

Language code list

Others

Table of languages and their abbreviations

– – –

CHI (ZH)

DUT (NL)

ENG (EN)

FRE (FR)

GER (DE)

ITA (IT)

JPN (JA)

KOR (KO)

MAY (MS)

SPA (ES)

No alternate

language

Chinese

Dutch

English

French

German

Italian

Japanese

Korean

Malay

Spanish

Afar

Abkhazian

Afrikaans

Amharic

Arabic

Assamese

Aymara

Azerbaijani

Bashkir

Belorussian

Bulgarian

Bihari

Bislama

Bengali, Bangla

Tibetan

Breton

Catalan

Corsican

Czech

Welsh

Danish

Bhutani

Greek

Esperanto

Estonian

Basque

Persian

Finnish

Fiji

Faroese

Frisian

Irish

Scottish Gaelic

Galician

Guarani

Gujarati

Hausa

Hindi

Croatian

Hungarian

Armenian

Interlingua

Interlingue

Inupiak

Indonesian

Icelandic

Hebrew

Yiddish

Javanese

Georgian

Kazakh

Greenlandic

Cambodian

Kannada

Kashmiri

Kurdish

Kirghiz

Latin

Lingala

Laotian

Lithuanian

Latvian, Lettish

Malagasy

Maori

Macedonian

Malayalam

Mongolian

Moldavian

Marathi

Maltese

Burmese

Nauru

Nepali

Norwegian

Occitan

(Afan) Oromo

Oriya

Panjabi

Polish

Pashto, Pushto

Portuguese

Quechua

Rhaeto-Romance

Kirundi

Rumanian

Russian

Kinyarwanda

Sanskrit

Sindhi

Sango

Serbo-Croatian

Singhalese

Slovak

Slovenian

Samoan

Shona

Somali

Albanian

Serbian

Siswati

Sesotho

Sundanese

Swedish

Swahili

Tamil

Telugu

Tajik

Thai

Tigrinya

Turkmen

Tagalog

Setswana

Tongan

Turkish

Tsonga

Tatar

Twi

Ukrainian

Urdu

Uzbek

Vietnamese

Volapük

Wolof

Xhosa

Yoruba

Zulu

Abbreviation

Language

Abbreviation

Language

Abbreviation

Language

172

Specification

Others

■Power requirement during operation

41W

■Power requirement at standby

3.7W (Eco mode: off)

1.9W (Eco mode: on)

■Power supply

230 - 240V AC, 50/60 Hz

■Mass

4.7kg

■External dimension

Width 430 x Height 78 x Depth 325mm

■Tuner

System: Frequency synthesizer

Channel coverage: PAL I VHF: A-J, 11, 13, E2-E12

UHF: E21-E69

CATV: X, Y, Z, S1-S41, 1-53

(48MHz to 464MHz, 8MHz

steps)

Stereo: NICAM-I

■Antenna input/output terminal

VHF/UHF: 75Ω, IEC Connector

■Signal system

Standard PAL Colour TV system

■Laser

Semiconductor laser, Wavelength: 650nm/780nm

■Format

DVD-VR format

DVD-Video format

■Image recording system

MPEG2

■Sound recording system

Dolby Digital M1, M2, Linear PCM

■VIDEO input

1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative,

Pin jack x 1 system, 1 in front

SCART socket x 2 at rear

■VIDEO output

1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative,

Pin jack x 1 system, 1 at rear

SCART socket x 2 at rear

■S-VIDEO input

(Y) 1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative,

Mini DIN4 Pin x 1 system

SCART socket x 1 at rear

■S-VIDEO output

(Y) 1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative,

Mini DIN4 Pin x 1 system

SCART socket x 1 at rear

■COMPONENT output (Y, PB, PR)

Y output (green), 1.0Vp-p (75Ω),

Sync signal negative, Pin jack x 1 system

PB, PR output (blue, red), 0.7Vp-p (75Ω),

Pin jack x 1 system each

■RGB input

(R) 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)

(G) 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)

(B) 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)

SCART socket x 1 at rear (AV2 only)

■RGB output

(R) 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)

(G) 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)

(B) 0.7Vp-p (75Ω)

SCART socket x 1 at rear (AV1 only)

■AUDIO input

2.0V (rms), 50kΩ or below, pin jack

(L, R) x 1 system

1 in front

SCART socket x 2 at rear

■AUDIO output

2.0V (rms), 200Ω or above, pin jack

(L, R) x 1 system

1 at rear

SCART socket x 2 at rear

173

Recording Playback Others

Introduction Editing Function setup

Library

■DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

BITSTREAM/PCM (OPTICAL terminal)

Optical connector x 1 system

■DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

BITSTREAM/PCM (COAXIAL terminal)

0.5Vp-p (75Ω), pin jack x 1 system

■CHANNEL CHANGE IR jack

This is for connection of the supplied IR control cable

only.

■DV input

4-pin x 1 in front

■Remote control

Wireless remote control (SE-R0132)

■Operating conditions

Temperature: 5°C ~ 35°C,

Position: Horizontal

■Clock display

24 hour digital display

■Clock accuracy

Quartz (monthly deviation: approximately ±30

seconds)

■Supplied Accessories

•Remote control ....................................................... 1

•Batteries (R03) ........................................................ 2

•Power cord .............................................................. 1

•Coaxial cable .......................................................... 1

•Video/Audio cable ................................................... 1

•IR control cable ....................................................... 1

•OWNER’S MANUAL (INSTALLATION GUIDE)....... 1

•OWNER’S MANUAL (OPERATIONS)..................... 1

•Quick Reference ..................................................... 1

•The design and specifications may change without prior

notice.

•The Illustrations and screens described in this manual

may be exaggerated or simplified for easy recognition

and may be slightly different from the actual unit.

174

Memo

175

Recording Playback Others

Introduction Editing Function setup

Library

Memo

Toshiba Rd Xs32Sb Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation